CONTENTdm
British Columbia Historical Books Collection
Bulletin (Smithsonian Institution. Bureau of American Ethnology)
Pilling, James Constantine, 1846-1895
"([United States] Bureau of American Ethnology. [Bulletin, no. 15]). Lists all types of sources, including manuscripts, which contain vocabularies. It offers valuable background to the compilation of Chinookan jargon dictionaries as well as providing biographical information on the compilers." -- Lowther, B. J., & Laing, M. (1968). A bibliography of British Columbia: Laying the foundations, 1849-1899. Victoria, BC: University of Victoria, p. 119.
xiii, 81 pages : facsimiles ; 25 cm
application/pdf
MZ33 SP^P SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION ^ffiEAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE iHINOOKAN LANGUAGES (INCLUDING THE CHINOOK J ARGON) BY JAMES CONSTANTINE PILLING- i HR Z7W9 C6 Pe copZ I WASHINGTON GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1893 3B cTliwc'tvu'sdeinJv ^/v.J/. ^fteew SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES (INCLUDING THE CHINOOK JARGON) In BY JAMES OONSTANTINE PILLING WASHINGTON GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1893 m / #0| 2 0 f I 71 /? LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES ISSUED BY THE BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. Smithsonian institution—Bureau of ethnology. Catalogue of linguistic manuscripts in the library of the Bureau of ethnology. By James C. Pilling. In Bureau of ethnology first annual report; half-title as above p. 553, text pp. 555-577, Washington, 1881, royal 8°. Issued separately with cover title as follows: Catalogue | of | linguistic manuscripts | in the | library of the Bureau of ethnology [ by | James C. Pilling | (Extracted from the first annual report of the Bureau | of ethnology) | [Vignette] | Washington | Government printing office | 1881 Cover title as above, no inside title, half-title as under entry next above p. 553, text pp. 555-577, royal 8°. One hundred copies issued. Smithsonian institution—Bureau of ethnology | J. W. Powell director | Proof-sheets | of a | bibliography | of | the languages | of the | North American Indians | by | James Constantine Pilling | (Distributed only to collaborators) | Washington | Government printing office | 1885 Title verso blank 11. notice (signed J. W. Powell) p. iii, preface (November 4,1884) pp. v-viii, introduction pp. ix-x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of libraries referred to by initials pp. xxxvii-xxxviii, list of fac-similes pp. xxxix-xl, text pp. 1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090, index of languages and dialects pp. 1091-1135, plates, 4°. Arranged alphabetically by name of author, translator, or first word of title. One hundred and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side of the sheet only. Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J.W.Powell, director | Bibliography | of the | Eskimo language | by | James Constantine Pilling | [Vignette] | Washington | Government printing office | 1887 Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 11. preface (April 20,1887) pp. iii-v, textpp. 1-109, chronologic index pp. 111-116,8 fac-similes, 8°. An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°. Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W.Powell, director | Bibliography | of the | Siouan languages | by | James Constantine Pilling | [Vignette] | Washington j Government printing office | 1887 Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 11. preface (September 1,1887) pp. iii-v, text pp. 1-82, chronologic index pp. 83-87, 8°. An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°. ru \> ,."-"- --j -': ■»—tot^ioarafa. ■._■ ■„■ '-•'■ . IV LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES, BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, director | Bibliography | of the | Iroquoian languages | by | James Constantine Pilling | [Vignette] | Washington | Government printing office | 1888 Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (December 15, 1888) pp. iii-vi, text pp. 1-180, addenda pp. 181-189, chronologic index pp. 191-208, 9 facsimiles, 8°. An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°. Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, director | Bibliography | of the | Muskhogean languages | by | James Constan- tiue Pilling | [Vignette] | Washington | Government printing office | 1889 Cover title as above,title as above verso blank 11. preface (May 15,1889) pp. iii-v, text pp. 1-103, chronologic index pp. 105-114,8°. An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°. Bibliographic notes | on | Eliot's Indian bible | and | on his other translations and works in the | Indian language of Massachusetts | Extract from a | Bibliography of the Algonquian languages | | [Vignette] | Washington | Government printing office | 1890 Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-58, 21 fac-similes, royal 8°. Forms pp. 127-184 of the Bibliography of the Algonquian languages, title of which follows. Two hundred and fifty copies issued. Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W.Powell,director | Bibliography | of the | Algonquian languages | by | James Constantine Pilling | [Vignette] | Washington | Government printing office | 1891 Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 11. preface (June 1,1891) pp. iii-iv, introduction p. v, index of languages pp. vii-viii, list of fac-similes pp. ix-x, text pp. 1-549, addenda pp. 551-575, chronologic index pp. 577-614,82 fac-similes, 8°. An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°. Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W.Powell, director | Bibliography | of the | Athapascan languages | by | James Constantine Pilling | [Vignette] | Washington | Government printing office | 1892 . Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. [list of] linguistic bibliographies issued by the Bureau of Ethnology pp. iii-iv, preface (June 15, 1892) pp. v-vii, introduction p. ix, index of languages pp. xi-xii, list of fac-similes p. xiii, text pp. 1-112, addenda pp. 113-115, chronologic index pp. 117-125, 4 fac-similes, 8°. An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°. PREFACE, The designation given the family of languages treated of in this bibliography is based upon the name of a tribe living near the mouth of the Columbia River, from whom a vocabulary was obtained by Gabriel Franchere, of the Pacific Fur Company, about 1812, and published in his I Relation"1 in 1820, under the name Chinouque ou Tchinouk. This vocabulary, consisting of thirty-three words, thirteen numerals, and eleven phrases, is given by Gallatin in his "Synopsis'" with the spelling of the name anglicized to Chinook; and, though based upon the speech of but a single tribe, it was adopted by him as the name of a family of languages. The family includes a number of tribes whose habitat, to quote from Major Powell,3 "extended from the mouth of the river up its course for some 200 miles, or to The Dalles. According to Lewis and Clarke, our best authorities on the pristine home of this family, most of their villages were on the banks of the river, chiefly upon the northern bank, though they probably claimed the land upon either bank for several miles back. Their villages also extended on the Pacific coast northward nearly to the northern extension of Shoalwater Bay, and to the south to about Tilamook Head, some 20 miles from the mouth of the Columbia." As will be seen by reference to the list of tribal names given on a subsequent page, the number of languages embraced within the family is small; and the amount of material recorded under "Chinook" will be found to more than equal that given under the names of all the other divisions of the family combined. As a matter of fact, but little, comparatively, has been done in the collection of linguistic material relating to this family, a fact all the more surprising when it is considered that they have been long in contact with the whites. There has been no grammar of the language published, and until lately none has been compiled; there is but one printed dictionary—that of Gibbs—and the vocabularies are neither great in length nor wide in scope. There is hope of a better state of 1 Relation d'un voyage a la c6te nord-ouest de l'Amerique Septentrionale dans les annees 1810,1811,1812,1813 et 1814. Montreal, 1820. 2 Synopsis of the Indian tribes within the United States east of the Rocky Moun- tains,andinth&British and Russian possessions in North America. Cambridge, 1836. 3 Indian linguistic families of America, north of Mexico. Washington, 1891. VI PREFACE. affairs, however; for Dr. Franz Boas, the latest and most thorough worker in the Chinookan field, has his grammar, dictionary, and texts in an advanced state of preparation for publication by tbe Bureau of Ethnology. His material, collected during 1890 and 1891, was gathered none too soon, for, as will be seen by the extract from the introduction to his legends, which he has kindly permitted me to make and which is given on page 7 of this paper, the opportunity for so doing would soon have passed. It needs but a glance through the accompanying pages to show the preponderance of material, both published and in manuscript, relating to the Jargon over that of the Chinookan languages proper, a preponderance so great that, were it proper to speak of the Jargon as an American language, a change of title to this bibliography would be necessary. Made up as it is from several Indian ton gues, the Chinookan1, Salishan, Wakashan, and Shahaptian principally, and from at least two others, the English and the French, the Chinook Jargon might with almost equal propriety have been included in a bibliography of any one of the other native languages entering into its composition. It is made a part of the Chinookan primarily because of its name and secondarily from the fact that that family has contributed a much greater number of words to its vocabulary than has any one of the others. Under various authors herein—Blanchet, Deiners, Gibbs, Hale, Le Jeune, and others—will be found brief notes relating to the Jargon, trade language, or international idiom, as'it is variously called; and the following succinct account of its origin from Dr. George Gibbs,1 the first to attempt its comprehensive study, completes its history: The origin of this Jargon, a conventional language similar to the Lingua Franca of the Mediterranean, the Negro-English-Dutch of Surinam, the Pigeon English of China, aind several other mixed tongues, dates back to the fur droguers of the last century. Those mariners, whose enterprise in the fifteen years preceding 1800 explored the intricacies of the northwest coast of America, picked up at their general rendezvous, Nootka Sound, various native words useful in barter, and thence transplanted them, with additions from the English, to the shores of Oregon. Even bef oretheirday, the coasting trade and warlike expeditions of the northern tribes, themselves a seafaring race, had opened up a partial understanding of each other's speech; for when, in 1792, Vancouver's officers visited Gray's Harbor they found that jthe natives, though speaking a different language, understood many words of the 'Nootka. On the arrival of Lewis and Clarke at the mouth of the Columbia, in 1806, the new language, from the sentences given by them, had evidently attained some form. It was with the arrival of Astor's party, however, that the Jargon received its principal impulse. Many more words of English were then brought in, and for the first time the French, or rather the Canadian and Missouri patois of the French, was introduced. The principal seat of the company being at Astoria, not only a large addition of Chinook words was made, but a considerable number was taken from the Chihalis, who immediately bordered that tribe on the north, each owning a portion of Shoalwater Bay. The words adopted from the several languages were, Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. Washington, 1863. *%%&. PREFACE. VII naturally enough, those most easily uttered by all, except, of course, that objects new to the natives found their names in French or English, and such modifications were made in pronunciation as suited tongues accustomed to different sounds. Thus the gutturals of the Indians were softened or dropped and the / and r of the English and French, to them unpronounceable, were modified into p and I. Grammatical forms were reduced to their simplest expression and variations in mood and tense conveyed only by adverbs or by the context. The language continued to receive additions and assumed a more distinct and settled meaning under the Northwest and Hudson's Bay Companies, who succeeded Astor's party, as well as through the American settlers in Oregon. Its advantage was soon perceived by the Indians, and the Jargon became to some extent a means of communication between natives of different speech as well as between them and the whites. It was even used as such between Americans and Canadians. It was at first most in vogue upon the Lower Columbia and the Willamette, whence it spread to Puget Sound and with the extension of trade found its way far up the coast, as well as the Columbia and Fraser rivers; and there are now few tribes between the 42d and 57th parallels of latitude in which there are not to be found interpreters through its medium. Its prevalence and easy acquisition, while of vast convenience to traders and settlers, has tended greatly to hinder the acquirement of the original Indian languages; so much so that, except by a few missionaries and pioneers, hardly one of them is spoken or understood by white men in all Oregon and Washington Territory. Notwithstanding its apparent poverty in number of words and the absence of grammatical forms, it possesses much more flexibility and power of expression than might be imagined and really serves almost every purpose of ordinary intercourse. The number of words constituting the Jargon proper has been variously stated. Many formerly employed have become in great measure obsolete, while others have been locally introduced. Thus, at The Dalles of the Columbia, various terms are common which would not he intelligible at Astoria or on Puget Sound. In making the following selection, I have included all those which, on reference to a number of vocabularies, I have found current at any of these places, rejecting on the other hand such as individuals partially acquainted with the native languages have employed for their own convenience. The total number falls a little short of five hundred words. This international idiom, as it is called by Mr. Hale, is yet a live language, and, though lapsing into disuse—being superseded by the English—in the land of its birth, is gradually extending along the northwest coast, adding to its vocabulary as it travels, until it has become the means of intertribal communication between the Indians speaking different languages and between them and the white dwellers in British Columbia and portions of Alaska. Indeed, there seems to be almost a revival of the early interest shown in it, if we may judge from the amount of manuscript material relating to it now being made ready to put into print. One of the most curious and interesting of all the curious attempts which have been made to instruct and benefit the Indians by means of written characters, is that known as the Kamloops Wawa, a periodical described herein at some length under the name of its founder, Pere Le Jeune. Written in an international language, I set up" in stenographic characters, and printed on a mimeograph by its inventor, editor, reporter, printer, and publisher all in one, this little weekly seems to leave nothing in the way of novelty to be desired. The account VIII PREFACE. of the reverend father's methods and purposes, quoted on page 48 from one of his papers, will well repay perusal. The present volume embraces 270 titular entries, of which 229 relate to printed books and articles and 41 to manuscripts. Of these, 253 have been seen and described by the compiler (222 of the prints and 31 of the manuscripts), leaving 17 as derived from outside sources (7 of the prints and 10 manuscripts). Of those unseen by the writer, titles and descriptions have been received in all cases from persons who have actually seen the works and described them for him. So far as possible, direct comparison has been made with the works themselves during the proof-reading. For this purpose, besides his own books, the, writer has had access to those in tbe libraries of Congress, the Bureau of Ethnology, the Smithsonian Institution, Georgetown University, and to several private collections in the city of Washington. Mr. Wilberforce Eames,has compared the titles of works contained in his own library and in the Lenox, and recourse has been had to a number of librarians throughout the country for tracings, photographs, etc. I am indebted to the Director of the Bureau, Major Powell, for the unabated interest shown in my bibliographic work, for the opportunities he has afforded me to prosecute it under the most favorable circumstances, and for his continued advice and counsel. Many items of interest have been furnished me by Dr. Franz Boas; the Rev. Myron Eells, Union City, Wash.; Mr. John K. Gill, Portland, Oregon; Hon. Horatio Hale, Clinton, Ontario; Father Le Jeune, Kam- loops, B. C.; Maj. Edmond Mallet,Washington, D. C.; Father St. Onge, Troy, K T., and Dr. T. S. Buhner, Cedar City, Utah. It gives me pleasure to make record of my obligations to these gentlemen. Washington, D. C, March 10,1893. INTRODUCTION. In the compilation of this catalogue the aim has been to include everything, printed or in manuscript, relating to the Chinookan language and to the Chinook jargon—books, pamphlets, articles in magazines, tracts, serials, etc., and such reviews and announcements of publications as seemed worthy of notice. The dictionary plan has been followed to its extreme limit, the subject and tribal indexes, references to libraries, etc., being included in one alphabetic series. 'The primary arrangement is alphabetic by authors, translators of works into the native languages being treated as authors. Under each author the arrangement is, first, printed works, and second, manuscripts, each group being given chronologically; and in the case of printed books each work is followed through its various editions before the next in chronologic order is taken up. Anonymously printed works are entered under the name of the author, when known, and under the first word of the title, not an article or preposition, when not known. A cross-reference is given from the first words of anonymous titles when entered under an author and from the first words of all titles in the Indian languages, whether anonymous or not. Manuscripts are entered under the author when known, under the dialect to which they refer when he is not known. Each author's name, with his title, etc., is entered in full but once, i.e., in its alphabetic order; every other mention of him is by surname and initials only. All titular matter, including cross-references thereto, is in brevier, all collations, descriptions, notes, and index matter in nonpareil. In detailing contents and in adding notes respecting contents, the spelling of proper names used in the particular work itself has been followed, and so far as possible the language of the respective writers is given. In the index entries of the tribal names the compiler has adopted that spelling which seemed to him the best. As a general rule initial capitals have been used in titular matter in only two cases: first, for proper names, and, second, when the word actually appears on the title-page with an initial capital and with the remainder in small capitals or lower-case letters. In giving titles in the German language the capitals in the case of all substantives have been respected. In those comparatively few cases of works not seen by the compiler the fact is stated or the entry is followed by an asterisk within curves, and in either case the authority is usually given. EC _^__L__ INDEX OF LANGUAGES, Page. Cascade 13 Cathlascon 13 Chinook 16 Chinook jargon 16 Clakama 18 Clatsop 18 Nihaloth 56 Wahaikan 74 Wappo 74 Wasko 74 Watlala 74 BW:- IS; J I LIST OF FACSIMILES. Page. Title-page of Le Jeune's Kamloops Wawa 47 Title-page of Le Jeune's Jargon Hymn Book 50 Title-page of Le Jeune's Jargon Primer 52 XTTT BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. By James O. Pilling. (An aatorisk within parentheses indicates that the compiler has seen no copy of the work referred to.) A. Allen (Miss A. J.) Ten years in Oregon. | Travels and adventures | of | doctor E. White and lady | west of the Rocky mountains; | with | incidents of two sea voyages via Sandwich | Islands around Cape Horn; | containing also a | brief history of the missions and settlements of the country— origin of | the provisional government—number and customs of the Indians— | incidents witnessed while traversing and residing iu the | territory—description of the soil, production and) climate of the country. | Compiled by miss A. J. Allen. | Ithaca, N. Y.: | Mack, Andrus & co. printers. | 1848. Title verso copyright (1848) 1 1. introduction pp. v-vi, contents pp. vii-xvi, text pp. 17-399,8°. A few Chinook jargon sentences (from Lee and Frost, Ten years in Oregon), pp. 395-396. Oopiet seen: Boston Athensum. A later edition with title-page as follows: Ten years | in | Oregon. | Travels and adventures | of | doctor E. White and lady, | west of the Rocky mountains; | with | incidents of two sea voyages via Sandwich | Islands around Cape Horn; | containing, also, a | brief history of the missions and settlement of the country—or- | igin of the provisional government—number and customs of | the Indians—incidents witnessed while traversing | and residing in the territory—description of | the soil production and climate. | Compiled by miss A. J. Allen, | Ithaca, N. Y.: | press of Andrus, Gauutlett & Co. | 1850. Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp. vj)-xvi, text pp, 17-430,12°. Allen (A.J.) — Continued. Linguistic contents as under title next above, pp.395-396. Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Congress, Dunbar. A later edition with title-page as follows: Thrilling adventures, | travels and explorations | of | doctor Elijah White, | among the | Rocky mountains | and in the | far west. | With | incidents of two sea voyages via Sand- | wich Islands around Cape Horn; | containing also a brief history of th6 missions and settlement of the country [ — origin of the provisional governments of the western | territories—number and customs of the Indians—| incidents witnessed while traversing and re- | siding in the territories—description of | the soil, productions and climate. ' Compiled by miss A. J. Allen. | New York: | J. W. Yale. | 1859. Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp. vii-xvi, text pp. 17-430,12°. Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 395-396. Copies seen : Bancroft, Congress. Anderson (Alexander Caulfield). Price one dollar and fifty cents. | Hand-book | and | map | to | the gold region | of | Frazer's and Thompson's rivers, | with | table of distances. | By Alexander C. Anderson, | late chief trader Hudson bay co.'s service. | To which is appended | Chinook Jargon—language used etc., etc. | Published by J. J. Lecount, | San Francisco. | Entered [&c. two lines.] [1858.] Cover title, text pp. 1-31, map, 32°. Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon, pp. 25-31, 1 mmmm wuum bibliography of the Anderson (A. C.) — Continued. In the only copy of this "work I have seen, Mr. Anderson has appended a manuscript note as follows: " This vocabulary, procured by the publisher from some one in S. F., is a miserable affair, and was appended "without my knowledge. A. c. A." Copies seen.- Bancroft. Vocabulary of the Chinook language. Manuscript, 14 pages folio; in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Forwarded to Dr. Geo. Gibbs, Nov. 7,1857. Contains about 200 words and phrases. Armstrong (A. N.) Oregon: | comprising a | brief history and full description | of the territories of | Oregon and Washington, | embracing the | cities, towns, rivers, bays, | harbors, coasts, mountains, valleys, | prairies *and plains; together ■with remarks | upon the social position, productions, resources, and | prospects of the country, a dissertation upon | the climate, and a full description of | the Indian tribes of the Pacific | slope, their manners, etc. | Interspersed with | incidents of travel and adventure. I By A. N. Armstrong, I for Armstrong (A. N.)— Continued, three years a government surveyor in Oregon. | Chicago: | published by Chas. Scott & co. | 1857. Title verso copyright 11. copy of correspondence pp. iii-iv, index pp. v-vi, textpp. 7-147,12°. Chinook Jargon vocabulary (75 words and numerals 1-10,20,100,1000), pp. 145-146. Copies seen : Astor, Boston Athenaeum, Congress. Astor: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the Astor Library, New York City. Authorities: SeeDufossG (E.) - Eells (M.) Field (T. W.) Gibbs (G.) Leclerc(C) Ludowig (H.E.) Pilling (J. C.) Pott (A. F.) Quaritch (B.) Sabin (J.) Steigor(E.) Triibner & co. Trumbull (J. H.) Vater (J. S.) B. Bancroft: This word following a title or within parentheses after anote indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of Mr. H. H. Bancroft, San Francisco, Cal. Bancroft (Hubert Howe). The | native races | of [ the Pacific states | of | North America. | By | Hubert Howe Bancroft. | Volume I. | Wild tribes [-V. | Primitive history]. | New York: | D. Appleton and company. | 1874[-1876]. 5 vols, maps and plates, 8°. Vol. I. Wild tribes; H. Civilized nations; III. Myths and languages; IV Antiquities; V. Primitive history. Some copies of vol. 1 are dated 1875. (Eames, Lenox.) About one-third of vol. 3 of this work is devojed to the languages of the west coast. Brief reference to the Chinook Jargon and its derivation, pp. 550-557 Classification of the aboriginal languages of the Pacific states (pp. 562-573) Includes the Chinook, p. 565.—"The Chinook language" (pp. 626-629) includes a gen" eral discussion, pp. 626-628; Personal pronouns intheWatlala dialect, p. 628; Conjugation of the verbs to be cold and to kill, pp. 628-629.— §hort comparative vocabulary of tl)e Columbian Bancroft (H. H.) — Continued. and Mexican tongues includes seven words of the Waiilatpu, Molale, Watlala, Chinook, Calapooya, Aztec, and Sonora, p. 631.—The Chinook Jargon (pp. 631-635) includes a gen- "eral discussion, pp. 631-634; Lord's prayer with interlinear English translation, p. 635. Copies seen.- Astor, Bancroft, Brinton, British Museum, Bureauof Ethnology, Eames, Georgetown, Powell. Priced by Leclerc, 1878, no. 49,150 fr. Bought by Quaritch at the Ramirez sale, no. 957, for 51. 15s. and priced by him, no. 29917, 51. The | native races | of | the Pacific ] states | of | North America. | By | Hubert Howe Bancroft. | Volume I. | Wild tribes[-V. [ Primitive history]. | Author's Copy. | San Francisco. 1874 [-1876]. 5 vols. 8°. Similar, exce'pt on title-page, to previous edition. One hundred copies issued. Copies seen: Bancroft, British Museum, Congress. In addition to the above the work has been issued with the imprint of Longmans, London; Maisonneuve,Paris; and Brockhaus, Leipzig; none of which have I seen. The works | of | Hubert Howe Bancroft. I Volume I[-V]. | The native *\\ CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. Bancroft (H. H.) — Continu races. | Vol. I. Wild tribes [-V. J^rlmi tivo history]. | San Francisco: | A. L. Bancroft & company, publishers. | 1882. 5 vols. 8°. This series will include the History of Central America, History of Mexico, etc., each with its own system of numbering, and also numbered consecutively in the series. Of these works there have been published vols. 1-39. The opening paragraph of vol. 39 gives the following information: 'l This volume closes the narrativo portion of my historical series; there yet remains to be completed the biographical section.'1 Copies seen: Bancroft, British Museum, Bureau of Ethnology, Congress. Bates (Henry Walton). Stanford's | compendium of geography and travel | based on Hellwald's ' Die Erde und ihre Volker' Central America | the West Indies | and | South America | Edited and extended | By H. W. Bates, | assistant- secretary of the Royal geographical society; | author of 'The naturalist on the river Amazons' | With | ethnological appendix by A. H. Eeane, B. A. | Maps and illustrations | London | Edward Stanford, 55, Charing cross, S. W. | 1878 Half-title verso blank 11. frontispiece 11. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp. vii-xvi, list of illustrations pp. xvii-xviii, list of maps p. xix, text pp. 1-441, appendix pp. 443- 561, index pp. 563-571, maps and plates, 8°. Eeane (A. II.), Ethnography and philology of America, pp. 443-561. Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, Eames, Geological Survey, National Museum. Stanford's | Compendium of geography and travel | based on Hellwald's 'Die Erde und ihre Volker' | Centra America | the West Indies | and | South America | Edited and extended | By H. W. Bates, | Author of [&c. two lines] | With | ethnological appendix by A. H. Keane, M. A. J. | Maps and illustrations | Second and revised edition | London | Edward Stanford, 55, Charing cross, S. W. | 1882 Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp. vii-xvi, list of illustrations pp. xvii-xviii, list of maps p. xix, text pp. 1-441, appendix pp. 443-561, index pp. 563-571, maps and plates, 8°. Linguistlo contents as under title next above, pp. 443-561. Copies seen: British Museum, Harvard. -1 Stanford's | compendium of geography and travel I based on Hellwald's Bates (H. W.) — Continued. 'Die Erde und ihre Volker' | Central America | the West Indies j and | Sooth America | Edited and extended | By H. W.Bates, | assistant-secretary[&c.two lines] | With [ ethnological appendix by A. H. Keane, M. A. I. | Maps and illustrations | Third edition | London I Edward Stanford, 55, Charing cross, S. W. | 1885 Collation and contents as in second edition, title and description of which are given above. Copies seen: Geological Survey. Beach (William Wallace). The | Indian miscellany; ] containing | Papers on the History, Antiquities, Arts, Languages, Religions, Traditions and Superstitious )(' | the American aborigines; |with | Descriptions of their Domestic Life, Manners, Customs, | Traits, Amusements, and Exploits; | travels and adventures in the Indian country; | Incidents of Border Warfare; Missionary Relations, etc. | Edited by W. W. Beach. 1 Albany: | J. Munsell, 82 State street. 1877. Title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 11. advertisement verso blank 11. contents pp. vii-viii, text pp. 9-477, errata p. 478, index pp. 479-490,8°. Gatschct (A. S.), Indian languages of the Pacific states and territories, pp. 416-447. Gopiesseen: Astor, Brinton, BritishMuseum, Congress, Eames, Geological Survey, Georgetown, Massachusetts Historical Society, Pilling, Wisconsin Historical Society. Priced by Leclerc, 1878 catalogue, no. 2663,20 fr. j the Murphy copy, no. 197, brought $1.25; priced by Clarke & co. 1886 catalogue, no. 6271, $3.50, and by Littlefield, Nov. 1887, no. 50, $4. Belden (Lieut. George P.) [Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon.] Manuscript, pp. 1—44,12°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology, Washington. D. C. Recorded iu a blank book. ' Explanatory, p. 1.—Vocabulary, alphabetically arranged by English words, pp. 2- Numerals 1-10,20,30,100,1000, p. 38.—Explanatory notes, pp. 39-44. A copy of the manuscript titled as follows: Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon. | Collected by | Lieut. G. P. Belden. | Arranged by | J. Cnrtin. Manuscript; title verso blank 1 1. text pp, 1-53, sm.4°; in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded in a blank book. -' The material is tbe same as in the original, but more systematically arranged, and the spelling is changed to more modern usage. 4 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Berghaus (Dr. Heinrich). Allgemeiner | ethnographischer Atlas | oder | Atlas der Volker-Kunde. | Eine Sammlung | von neiinzehn Karten, | auf denen die, um die Mitte des neunzehnten Jahr- hunderts statt findende|geographische Verbreitung aller, nach ihrer Sprach- verwandtschaft geord- | neten, Volker des Erdballs, und ihre Vertheilung in die Reiche und Staaten | der alten wie der neuen Welt abgebildet und versinn- licht worden ist. | Ein Versuch | von | Dr Heinrich Berghaus. | Verlag von Justus Perthes in Gotha. | 1852. Title of the series (Dr. Heinrich Berghaus' physikalischer Atlas, etc.) verso 1.1 recto blank, title as above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-68,19 maps, folio. No. 17. "Oregon-Volker'' treats of the habitat and linguistic relations of the peoples of that region, among others the Tshinuk and its dialects, p. 56.—Map no. 17 is entitled: "Etlmo- graphische Karte von Nordamerika" "Nach Alb. Gallatin, A. von Humboldt, Clavigero, Hervas, Hale, Isbester, <fec." Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology. Bergholtz (Gustaf Fredrik). The Lord's Prayer | in the | Principal Languages, Dialects and | Versions of the World, | printed in | Type and Vernaculars of the | Different Nations, | compiled and published by | G. F. Bergholtz. j Chicago, Illinois, | 1884. Title verso copyright 1 1. ^contents pp. 3-7, preface p. 9, text pp. 11-200,12°. The Lord's prayer in a number of American languages, among them the Chinook, p. 36. Copies seen: Congress. Bible history: Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Bible stories: Chinook Jargon SeeLeJeune(J.M.R.) St. Onge (L. N.) See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) [Blanchet (Rt. Rev. Francis Norbert).] A Complete Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon (English-Chinook and Chinook- English) ; to which are added numerous Conversations, thereby enabling any person to speak the Chinook correctly. Third edition, published by S. J. M'Cormick. Portland, O. T. 1856. (*) 24 pp. 24°. Title from Triibner's Bibliographical Guideto A.meiican Literature (1859),p.249. I put this and following titles under this author's name upon information furnished by Mr. J. K. Gill, the compiler of the editions subsequent to the seventh, Blanchet (F. N.) — Continued. [ ] A Complete Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. English-Chinook,and Chinook-English. To which is added numerous conversations, &c. Third edition. Portland, Oregon: published by S. J.McCormick. [1862?] (*) 24 pp. 24°. The above title, omitting the date, is from Gibbs's Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon, where he says: "Several editions of this work have been published; the last which I have seen, in 1862." [ ] Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | to which is added | numerous conversations, | thereby enabling any person to | speak Chinook correctly. | Fourth Edition. | Portland, Oregon: | published by S. J. McCormick. | Franklin book store, Front-st. | 1868. Cover title as above, inside title as above verso name of printer 1 1. preface and rules for pronunciation p. [3], text pp. 4-21,18°. Vocabulary, part I.—English and Chinook (alphabetically arranged, double columns), pp. 4-13—Numerals 1-1000, p. 13.—Vocabulary, part I. [sic]—Chinook and English (alphabetically arranged, double columns), pp. 14-18.— Conversations (English and Chinook, parallel columns), pp. 19-21. Copies seen: Eames. [ ] Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | to which is added | Numerous Conversations, | thereby enabling any person to | speak Chinook correctly. | Sixth edition. | Portland, Oregon: | published by S. J. M'Cormick, 19 First st. | Franklin bookstore. [1873?] Cover title as above verso advertisement, title as above verso preface and rule for pronunciation 11. text pp. 3-24,24°. Vocabulary. Part first. English-Chinook, (alphabetically arranged, double columns), pp. 3-15—Numerals, p. 15.—Part second. Chinook and English (alphabetically arranged, double columns), pp. 16-21. — Conversations, English- Chinook, pp. 22-24.—Lord's prayer in Jargon, with interlinear English translation, p. 24. Copies seen: Eord. [ ] Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon | to which is added | numerous conversations, [ thereby enabling any person | to speak Chinook correctly. | Sixth edition. | Portland, Oregon: | F. L. McCormick, publisher, 63 First street. | 1878. Title verso preface J 1. text pp. 3-26,24°, CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. Blanchet (F. N.) — Continued. English-Chinook vocabulary, pp. 3-10.— Chinook-English vocabulary, pp. 17-23.—Conversations in English-Chinook, pp. 24-26.— Lord's prayer in Jargon, p. 26. ■Copies seen: Bancroft. [ ] Dictionary [ of the | Chinook Jargon, | to which is added | numerous conversations, | thereby enabling any person | to speak Chinook correctly. | Seventh edition. | Portland,Oregon. | F. L. McCormick, publisher, 91 Second street. | 1879. Cover title as above, title as above verso preface 11. text pp. 3-26,24°. English-Chinook vocabulary, pp. 3-16.— Chinook-English vocabulary, pp. 17-23—Conversations in English-Chinook, pp. 24-26.— Lord's prayerin Jargon, p. 26. Copies seen: Congress, Georgetown, Welles- ley. For later editions, see Gill (J. K.) [Writings in the Chinook Jargon.] In the preface to the Chinook Dictionary, &c by Father Demers and others, is a statement concerning the origin of the Chinook Jargon and -those who have written therein, from which I make the following extract: "The Chinook Jargon was invented by the Hudson Bay Company traders, who were mostly French-Canadians. Having to trade wit li tue numerous tribes inhabiting the countries west of the Rocky Mountains, it was necessary to have a language understood by all. Henoe the idea of composing the Chinook Jargon, Fort Vancouver being the principal post, the traders of tbe twenty-nine forts belonging to the company, on the western slope, and the Indians from every part of that immense country, had to come to Vancouver for the trading season. They used to learn the Chinook [Jargon], and then teach it to others. In this manner, it became universally known, !.' The two first missionaries to Oregon, Rev. F. N. Blanchet, V. G-, and his worthy companion, Rev, Mod. Demerg, arrived from Canada to Vancouver, on the 24th of November, 1838, They had to instruct numerous tribes of Indians, and the wives and children of the whites, who spoke only the Chinook. The two missionaries set to work to learn it, and in a few weeks Father Demers had inastei-ed it, and began to preach. ;' He composed a vocabulary which was very useful to other missionaries. He oomposed several canticles which the Indians learned and sang with taste and delight. He also translated all the Christian prayers in the same language, "Such is the origin of the Chinook Jargon, which enabled the two first missionaries in the country to do a great, deal of good among the Indians and half-breeds. The invention of the Catholic-Ladder, in April, 1839, by Very Rev. Blanchet, and its [oral] explanation in Chinook, Blanchet (F.N.) — Continued. had a marvelous success, and gave the Catholic missionaries a great superiority and preponderance much envied by the missionaries belonging to other denominations. "Father Demers, afterwards Bishop of Vancouver's Island, has now gone to enjoy the reward of his great labours and apostolic zeal. It would be too bad to lose his dictionary and other Chinook works. So Archbishop Blanchet, who has himself made a compendium of the Christian Doctrinein the same language,has had the good inspiration to get the whole published with his corrections and additions."—St. Onge, in Delivers' Chinook Dictionary. Referring to the Catholio Ladder, " and its explanation in Chinook," mentioned in the above extract, Father St. Onge writes me as follows: "The Catholic Ladder, of which I sent you a copy, was, as you suggest, published by Father Lacombe; but* it is only an embellished edition of the Ladder invented by Archbishop Blanchet, in April, 1839. The archbishop never printed any Chinook explanation of it, and in my preface to the Chinook Dictionary the word oral should have been inserted." See Demers (M.), Blanchet (F. N.) and St. Onge (L.N.) Bishop Blanchet was born at St. Pierre, Riviere-du-Sud, Quebec, Canada, September 5, 1795; was educated in the Petit Seminaire, Quebec, and was ordained July 18, 1819, by Arohbishop Plessis. In 1811 the Pacific Fur Company established a trading post, called Astoria, at the mouth of the Columbia River. After came the Hudson's Bay Company, employing many Canadians, most of whom were Catholics. Many of them settled and intermarried with the Indians of the territory, and with these there was a demand for Catholic priests and Catholic worship. Application was first made to the Rt. Rev. J. N. Provenchei', Bishop of Juliopolie (Red River), The demand for Catholic priests was earnestly indorsed by Sir George Simpson, governor of the Hudson Bay Company, writing from the British capital (1838). He applied to the Mt. Rev. Joseph Signay, then Archbishop of Quebec. At once, in April, 1838, Bishop Signay instructed two of his missionaries, the Very Rev. F. N, Blanohet and the Rev. Modeste Demers, to take chargeaf the mission "situated between the Pacific Ooean and the Rocky Mountains"—a mighty charge for two men; but the men were apostles, and, therefore, as full of practical aeal as of practical faith, Father Blanchet was vlcar-general, with Father Demers as assistant. The journey of the devoted missionaries to their new mission was along an.4 most laborious one, familiar enough in early Catholic Amerioau history, though almost incomprehensible to us ■ iu these days of rapid and easy transit. They labored on their route, baptizing and confirming in the faith many Indians, who, at various forts, thronged to meet the long-looked-for black iiv--'-. m gsgjBJgi&afcf. Iy£i8llj£l BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Blanchet (F. N.) —Continued. gowns. Their destination was Fort Vancouver, which they reached November 24,1838. Vancouver was at this time the principal fort of the. Hudson Bay Company, and this the missionaries made their headquarters while for four years they toiled unaided up and down the wide domain of their mission. The letters of the fathers describing their work and surroundings are full of interest and afford valuable material for history. They learned the Indian tongue and taught the natives the simple prayers and doctrines of the church in their own language; Father Demers attending more to the Indians, and Father Blanchet to the Canadians. With the rapid growth of the missions the | Holy See, at the request of the Bishops of Quebec and Baltimore, erected Oregon into a vicariate-apostolic (December 1,1843), appointing Father Blanchet its vicar-apostolic The papal briefs arrived on November 4, and Father Blanchet,setting out for Canada,received his consecration in Montreal at the hands of the Archbishop of Quebec. Thence he went to Rome, which he reached in January, 1846. and set before the Pope the great wants of his vicariate. At his intercession, in July, 1846, after the accession of Pius IX., the vicariate of Oregon was erected into an ecclosiastical province, with the three sees of Oregon City, Walla Walla (now Wallula), and Vancouver's Island. The Rt. Rev. F. N. Blanchet was appointed to Oregon City; the Rt. Rev. A. M. A. Blanchet, his brother, to Walla Walla, and the Rt. Rev. M. Demers to Vancouver Island. The necessity of this division may be judged from the result of the missionaries' labors at the end of I 1844. Most of the Indian tribes of the Sound, Caledonia, and several of the Rocky Mountains and of Lower Oregon, had been won over to the faith. Nine missions had been founded—five in Lower Oregon and four at the Rocky Mountains. Eleven churches and chapels had been erected—five in Lower Oregon, two in Cale- | donia, and four at theRocky Mountains. There were two educational establishments—one for boys and the other for girls. There were fifteen priests, secular and regular, besides the sisters. These figures may not look large to-day, but they were large at the time, and of great signif* icance iu a rapidly populating and growing region. Meanwhile the archbishop of Oregon City had been very active abroad in aid of his new province and its dioceses. He sought help on all sides, and returned in August, 1847, accompanied by a colony of twenty persons, comprising seven sisters of Notre Dame de Namur, tlrree Jesuit fathers, three lay brothers, five secular priests, two deacons, and one cleric. . In 1855 the archbishop started for South America to collect for his needy diocese. He traversed Chile, Bolivia, and Peru, returning in 1857 after a successful expedition. Two years later he departed for Canada, returning the Blanchet (F. N.) — Continued. same year with twelve sisters of the Holy Names of Jesus and Mary for Portland, two Sisters of St. Ann for Victoria, some others for Vancouver, and three priests. In 1866 the archbishop attended the second Plenary Council of Baltimore, and, ever watchful for the cares of his diocese, returned with one priest and eight sisters. On July 18,1869, . he celebrated the fiftieth anniversary of his ordination to the priesthood, and four months later left for Rome to assist at the Vatican council, where he met his early brother missionaries. He returned to Portland in 1870. On July 1, 1879, Archbishop Seghers, the coadjutor, arrived at Portland, and was received by the venerable founder of the diocese, surrounded by his clergy and faithful flock. In a few words of touching simplicity and sweetness the aged prelate received and welcomed his youthful colaborer to the field where he had planted and sowed and reaped so well. After initiating Archbishop Seghers into the workof the diocese, the venerable man chose wholly to retire from the scene of his active labors, and published his farewell pastoral on the 27th day of February, 1881 Mallet. Boas (Dr. Franz). Chinook [Jargon] songs. In Journal of Am. Folk-lore, vol. 1, pp. 220- 226, Boston and New York, 1888,8°. (Pilling.) Thirty-eight songs, one verse each, with Knglish translation, pp. 221-224.—Three songs with music, p. 225.—One song in Chinook, except the last line, which is in Tliugit, p. 225.— Glossary of Chinook words (74), alphabetically arranged, pp. 225-226. Notes on the Chinook language. By Franz Boas. In American Anthropologist, vol. 6, pp. 55-63, Washington, 1893.8°. (Pilling.) Tribal divisions, p. 55.—Characters used to render the sounds of the Chinook language, pp. 55-56.—Discussion of the language, p. 57.— Genders, with examples, pp. 57-58.—Plurals, with examples, pp. 58-59.—Cases, with examples, pp. 59-60.—Numerals, p. 60.—Verbs, pp. 00-62.—Word composition, pp. 62-63. [Myths, legends, and texts in the Chinookan languages.] Manuscripts, four note books, sm. 4°; in tne library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Note book no. 1. Texts, etc., in the Chinook dialect: Cikla, a creation myth, p. 1; Ckulkulotl, the salmon spear, p. 15; The panther and the stick, p. 26.—Waskotext: Coyote anu eagle, p. 32.—Clackamas text, p. 33.—Katiamat texts: Ak'asqenaqena, p. 34; The flooa, p. 48; Tiape- qoqot, p. 54.—Clatsop vocabulary, pp. 68-91. Note book no. 2. Explanation of Chinook texts, pp. 1-19.—Sentences and vocabulary, Chinook dialect, pp. 19-33—Explanation of Katiamat texts, pp. 33-57.—Clackamas vocabulary, pp. 1-11.—Wasko vocabulary, pp. 1-11. CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. Boas (F.) — Continued. Note book no. 3. Chinook texts with interlinear translations left-hand pages, grammatic and lexicographic explanations on right-hand pages: Cikla, concluded, p. 34; Okula'm, p 38; Entsq, p. 58; Crow and eagle, p. 70; The child of the West Wind, p. 75; Caqatl, p. 105; The salmon, p. 113; Customs referring to war, p. 145; War between the Kwiley ut and Clatsop, p. 146; The first visit of a ship, p. 150; The sea- lion hunters, p. 155; Raven and gull, pi 170; The skunk, p. 174; Bluejay and his sister go visiting (1), p. 180; Marriage, p. 193; Bluejay and robin, p. 197; Marriage, continued, p. 201; Bluejay and his sister (2), p.203; Bluejay and his sister (3), p. 214; Souls and Shamans, p. 228; Adolescence of girls, p. 262; Birth, p. 267; Death and sickness, p. 269; Whaling, p. 282; The elk hunter, p. 288; The coyote and the salmon, p. 295; Potlatch, p.313; Gitla'unatlq, p.318; The crane, p. 331.—Katiamat texts. Visit to the sun, p. 31; The raccoon, p. 40; Coyote and badger, p. 55; Panther and lynx, p. 68; Emo- goalek,p.76; The seal, p. 87; Visit to the world of tho souls, p. 92; Tlgu'lak, p. 98; The mink, p. 103; Robin and salmon berry, p. 119; Panther and owl, p. 131; The coyote, p. 146; The famine, p.151. Note book no. 4. Chinook explanations of texts, pp. 1-19.—Notes on Chinook dialect from tbe explanations of the Katlamet texts, pp. 19- 32.—Katlametexplanations of texts, pp. 33-48.— Katlama; taken from explanations of Chinook texts, pp. 48-54. Since the above was nut in type I have seen a portion of this material in a more advanced state of preparation for the press. It still reqnires about oue hundred pages to make it complete. It is headed as follows: Chinook Texts | Told by Charles Cultee; | Recorded and translated | by | Franz Boas. Manuscript, 11. i-iv, 1-252 folio, written on one side only; in possession of its author. Introduction, 11. i—ii.—[Sounds of] letters, 11. iii-iv.—Cikla, their myth, with literal interlinear translation into English, 11.1-13; a free English translation, 11. 14-20. — Okula'm, her myth, with literal interlinear translation into English, 11.21-33; a free English translation, 11. 34-42.—Anektiyo'lemiy, her myth, with interlinear English translation, 11. 43-59; English translation, 11. 59-70.—The salmon, his myth, with interlinear English translation, 11.72-90 ; English translation. 11.91-102 Raven and gull, theirmyth, with interlinear English translation, • 11. 104-100; English translation, 11. 107-108— Coyote, his myth, with interlinear English translation.il. 109-119; English translation,!]. 119-123.—The crane, his myth, with interlinear English translation, 11.125-128; English translation, 11.129-130.—Enstiy, his myth, with interlinear English translation, 11.131-137; English translation, 11. 137-142.—The crow, his story, with interlinear English translation, 11.143-145 ■. Boas (F.) — Continued. English translation, 11. 145-147.— Caxas, his myth, with interlinear English translation, 11. 148-152; English translation, 152-155—Stilcua, her myth, with interlinear English translation, 11.156-164; English translation, 11.164-168.—The skunk, his story, withinterlinear English translation, 11.169-172; Englishtranslation,11.172-173. —Robin, their myth, and Bluejays, with interlinear English translation, 11. 175-177; English translation, 11. 178-179.—Bluejay and Ioi, their myth (1), withinterlinear English translation, 11. 180-186; English translation, 11. 186-190.—Tho same (2), 11.191-199, 199-202.—The same (3), 11. 203-215 (11. 209-214 missing) .—LI. 216-235 missing.—Thesoul, withinterlinear English translation, U. 236-24^ English translation, 11.248-252. At the close of each myth will appear explanatory notes. I copy the following notes from the Introduction : The following texts were collected in the summers of 1890 and 1891. While studying the Salishan languages of Washington and Oregon I heard that the dialects of tho Lower Chinook were on the verge of disappearing; that only a few individuals of the once powerful tribes of the Clatsop and Chinook survived who remembered their languages. This fact determined me to make an effort to collect what little remained of these languages. I first went to Clatsop, where a small band of Indians is located near Seaside, Clatsop County, Oregon. Although a number of them belonged to the Clatsop tribe, they had all adopted the Nehelim language, a dialect of the Salishan Tillamook. This change of language was brought about by frequent intermarriages with the Nehelim. I found one middle-aged man and two old women who still remembered tho Clatsop language, but I found it impossible to obtain more than a vocabulary and a few sentences. The man had forgotten too great a part of the language, while the women were not able to grasp what I wanted. They claimed to have forgotten their myths and traditions, and could not or would not give me any connected texts. One old Clatsop woman, who hadbeen married to a Mr. Smith, was too sick to be seen and died soou after my visit. The few remaining Clatsop had totally forgotten the history of their tribe and even maintained that no allied dialect was spoken north of Columbia River and on Shoal- water Bay. They assured me that the whole country was occupied by the Chihalis, another Salishan tribe. They told me, however, that a few of their relations, who still continued to speak Clatsop, lived on Shoalwater Bay among the Chihalis. I went to search for these people and found them located at Bay Center, Pacific County, Washington. They proved to be the last survivors of the Chinook, who at one time occupied tho greater part of Shoalwater Bay and the northern bank of Columbia River as far as Grey's Harbor. Tho tribo has adopted the Chihalis language in the same way in which 8 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Boas (F.) — Continued. the Clatsop have adopted the Nehelim. The only ones who spoke Chinook were Joseph Cnltee and Katharine. While I was unable to obtain anything from the latter, Cnltee proved to be a veritable storehouse of information. His wife is a Chihalis and he speaks now-a-days exclusively Chihalis, which is also the language of his children. Ho has lived for along time in Katiamat. his mother's town, and speaks for this reason the Katiamat dialect as well as the Chinook dialect. He uses this dialect in conversing with Samson, a Katiamat Indian, who is also located at Bay Center. Until a few years ago he spoke Chinook with one of his relations, while he uses It now only when conversing with Katharine, who lives a few miles from Bay Center. Possibly this Chinook is to a certain extent mixed with Katiamat expressions, but from a close study of the material I have reached the conclusion that it is. on the whole, pure and trustworthy; I have also obtained from Cnltee a series of Katiamat texts^which I believe are not quite as good as the Chinook text, but nevertheless give a good insight into the differences of the two dialects. It may be possible to obtain material on this dialect from other sources. My work of translating and explaining the texts was greatly facilitated by Cultee's remarkable intelligence. After he had once grasped what I wanted he explained to me the grammatical structure of the sentences by means of examples and elucidated the sense of difficult periods. This work was the more difficult as we conversed only by means of the Chinook Jargon. The following pages contain nothing but the texts with notes and translations. The grammar and dictionary of t he language will contain acomparison of all the dialects of the Chinookan stock. I have translated the first two texts almost verbatim, while in the latter texts I only endeavored to render the sense accurately, for which purposes short sentences have been inserted, others omitted. [Grammar and dictionary of the •Chinook language. By Dr. Franz Boas.] (*) Manuscript, in possession of its author, who is preparing it for publication. See note above. See Buhner (T. S.) . Franz Boas was born in Minden, Westphalia, Germany, July 9,1858. From 1877 to 1882 he attended the universities of Heidelberg, Bonn, and Kiel. The year 1882 he spent in Berlin preparing for an Arctic, voyage, and sailed June, 1883, to Cumberland Sound, Baffin Land, traveling in that region until September, 1884, returning via St. Johns, Newfoundland, to New York. The winter of 1884-1885 he spent ill Washington, preparing the results of his journey for publication and in studying in the Boas (F.) — Continued. National Museum. From 1885 to 1886 Dr. Boas was an assistant in the Royal Ethnographical Museum of Berlin, and Docent of Geography at the University of Berlin. In the winter of 1885- 1886 he journeyed to British Columbia under the auspices of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, for the purpose of studying the Indians. During 1886-1888 Dr. Boas was assistant editor of " Science," in New York, and from 1888 to 1892 Docent of Anthro ■ pology at Clark University, Worcester, Mass. > During these years he made repeated journeys to the Pacific coast with tho object of continuing his researches among the Indians. Dil891 Kiel gave him the degree of Ph. D. Dr. Boas's principal writings are: Baffin Land, Gotha, Justus Perthes, 1885; The Central Eskimo (in the 6th Annual Report of the Bureau o'f Ethnology); Reports to the British Association for the Advancement of Science on the Indians of British Columbia, 1888-1892; Volkssagen aus Britisch Columbien, Verh. der Ges. fur Anthropologic,Ethnologie und Urge- schichte in Berlin, 1891. Bolduc: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in th.e library of Rev. J.-B. Z, Bolduc, Quebec, Canada. Bolduc (Fere Jean-Baptiste Zacarie). Mission | de la | Colombie. | Lettre et journal | de | Mr. J.-B. Z. Bolduc, | mis- sionnaire de la Colombie. | [Picture of a church.] | Quebec: | de l'imprimerie de J.-B. Frechette, pere, | imprimeur-libraire, No. 13, rue Lamontagne. [1813.] Title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-95,16°. The larger part of the edition of this work was burned in the printing office, and it is, in consequence, very scarce. Lord's pr ayer in Tchinouc Jargon with interlinear French translation, p. 94.—Quelqnesmots [14], French, Tchinoucs [Jargon] et Suramins, p. 95. Copies seen: Bolduc, Mallet, Wellesley. Boston Athenajum: These words following a title or within parentheses after a note indicate that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of that institution, Boston, Mass. Boston Public: These words following a title or within parentheses after a note indicate that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in that library, Boston,Mass. Boulet (Rev. Jean-Baptiste), editor. See Youth's Compauion. Brinton: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note ind icates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of Dr. D. G. Brinton, Philadelphia, Pa. CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. Brinton (Dr. Daniel Garrison). The language of palaeolithic man. In American Philosoph. Soc. Proc. vol. 25, jfp. 212-225, Philadelphia, 1888,8°. Terms for I, thou, man, divinity, in Chinook, p. 216. Issued separately as follows: The language | of | palaeolithic man. | By | Daniel G. Brinton, M. D., | Professor of American Linguistics and Ar- ehaeologyin the University of Pennsylvania. | Read before the American Philosophical Society, | October 5,1888. | Press of MacCalla & co., | Nos. 237-9 Dock Street, Philadelphia. j 1888. Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 11. text pp. 3-16,8°. Linguistic contents as under title next ' above, p. 7. Copies seen: Eames,Pilling. This article reprinted in the following: — Essays of an Americanist. | I. Ethnologic and Archseologic. | II. Mythology and Folk Lore. | IH. Graphic Systems and Literature. | IV. Linguistic. | By | Daniel G. Brinton, A.M., M.D., | Professor [&c. nine lines.] | Philadelphia: | Porter & Coates. j 1890. Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v-xii, text pp. 17-467, index of authors and authorities pp. 469-474, index of subjects pp. 475-489,8°. A collected reprint of some of Dr. Brinton's more important essays. Theearliest form of human speech as revealed by American tongues (read before the American Philosophical Society in 1885,and published in their proceedings under the title of " Tbe language of palaeolithic man"), pp. 390-409. Linguistic contents as under titles next above, p. 401. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Pilling. The American Race: | A Linguistic Classification and Ethnographic | Description of the Native Tribes of | North and South America. | By | Daniel G.Brinton,A.M.,M.D., | Professor [&c. ten lines.] | New York: | N. D. C. Hodges, Publisher, | 47 Lafayette Place. | 1891. Title verso copyright notice 1 1. dedication verso blank 11. preface pp. ix-xii, contents pp. xiii-xvi, text pp. 17-332, linguistic appendix pp. 333-364, additions and corrections pp. 365-368, index of authors pp. 369-373. index of subjects pp. 374-392, Sc. A brief discussion of the north Pacific coast stocks (pp. 103-117) includes a list of the divisions of the Chinook linguistic stock, p. 108. Brinton (D. G.) — Continued. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology,Eames, Pilling. Daniel Garrison Brinton, ethnologist, born in Chester County, Pa., May 13, 1837. He was graduated at Yale in 1858 and at the Jefferson Medical College in 1861, after which he spent a year in Europe in study and in travel. On his return he entered the array, in August, 1862, as acting assistant surgeon. In February of the following year ho was commissioned surgeon and served as surgeon-in-chief of the second division, eleventh corps. He was present at the battles of Chancellorsville, Gettysburg, and other engagements, and was appointed medical director of his corps in October, 1863. In consequence of a sunstroke received soon after the battle of Gettysburg he was disqualified for active service, and in the autumn of that year he became superintendent of hospitals at Quincy and Springfield, 111., until August, 1865, when, . the civil Avar having closed, he was brevetted lieutenant-colonel and discharged. He then settled in Philadelphia, where he became editor of " The Medical and Surgical Reporter," and also of the quarterly "Compendium of Medical Science." Dr. Brinton has likewise been a constant contributor to othermedical journals, chiefly on questions of public medicine and hygiene, and has edited several volumes on therapeutics and diagnosis, especially the popular series known as "Napheys's Modern Therapeutics," which has passed through many editious. In the medical controversies of the day, he has always taken the position that medical science should be based on the results of clini cal observation rather than on physiological experiments. He has become prominent as a student and a writer on American ethnology, his work in this direction beginning while he was a student in college. The winter of 1856-'57, spent in Florida, supplied him with material for his first published book on the subject. In 1884 he was appointed professor of ethnology and archaeology in the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia. For some years he has been president of the Numismatic and Antiquarian Society of Philadelphia, and iu 1886 he was elected vice-presiden t of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, to preside over the section on anthropology. During the same year he was awarded the medal of the " Societe Americaine de France" for his " numerous and learned works on American ethnology," being the first native of the United States that has been so honored. In 1885 the American publishers of tho " Iconographic Encyclopaedia" requested him to edit the first volume, to contribute to it the articles on "Anthropology" and "Ethnology," and to revise that on "Eth- nograhy,"by Professor Gerland, of Strpasburg. He also contributed to the second volume of the same work an essay on the'' Prehistoric Archaj. ology of both Hemispheres." Dr.Brinton has established a library and publishing house of aboriginal American literature, for the purpose r SWw,"*JBW 1 iO BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Brinton (D. G.) — Continued. of placing within the reach of scholars authentic materials for the study of the languages and culture of the native races of America. Each work is the production of native minds and is printed in the original. The series, most of which were edited. by Dr. Brinton himself, includes "The Maya Chronicles" (Philadelphia, 1882); "The Iroquois Book of Rites" (1883); "The Guegiience: A Comedy Ballet in the Nahuatl Spanish Dialect of Nicaragua " (1883); "A Migration Legend of the Creek Indians " ■ (1884); " TheLenape and TheirLegends" (1885); "The Annals of the Cakchiquels" (1885). ["Ancient Nahuatl Poetry" (1887).; "Rig Veda Americanus (1890).] Besides publishing numerous papers, he has contributed valuable reports on his examination of mounds, shell- heaps, rock- inscriptions, and other antiquities. He is the author of " The Floridian Peninsula: Its Literary History, Indian Tribes, and Antiquities" (Philadelphia, 1859); "The Myths of the New World: A Treatise on the Symbolism and Mythology of tbe Red Race of America'' (New York, 1868); " The.Religious Sentiment: A Contribution to the Science and Philosophy of Religion" (1876) " American Hero Myths: A Study in the Native Religions of the AVestern Continent" (Philadelphia, 1882); "Aboriginal American Authors and their Productions, Especially those in the Native Languages" (1883); and "A Grammar of the Cakchiquel Language of Guatemala" (1884).—Appleton's Cyclop, of Am. JSiog. British Museum: These words following a title or within parentheses after a note indicate that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of that institution, London, Eng. Buhner (Dr. Thomas Sanderson). Chinook Jargon | grammar and dictionary | compiled by | T. S. Bulmer, M.L\, C. M., F. S. A., London, | Surgeon- Accoucheur, Royal College of Surgeons, England. | Author of [&c. four lines.] (*) Manuscript in possession of its author, Cedar City, Utah, who furnished me the above transcript of the title-page, and who writes me, October, 1891, concerning it as follows: " I shall issue it on Hall's typewriter, and then duplicate copies with another special machine, and use various types on tho machine, testing tho uses of each. . . . Fifty pages will bo devoted to the origin of tho language from all sources. Examples of hymns from various languages will be given. Chinook Jargon language. | Part IT. | [Two lines Chinook Jargon.] | To be completed in IX parts. | compiled by | T.S. Bulmer, M. D., CM., F. S.A. Sc. A., London. | Ably assisted by | Rev'd M. Eells, D. D., and Rev'd Pere N. L. Bulmer (T. S.) — Continued. St. Onge, (formerly missionary to the | Yakama Indians). Manuscript; title as above verso blank 1 1. text 11.1-124,4°. In possession of Dr. Bulmer. Preface in English, 11. 1-3; in Jargon, with interlinear English translation, 11. 4-12.— Eulogy of the Chinook Jargon, in English, 11. 13-15; in Jargon (with interlinear translation into English) by Mr. Eells, 11. 16-19.—The Chinook Jargon (general remarks, Avith interlinear English translation), 11. 20-22.—Special notes on the Chinook, 11.23-21.—Bibliography of the Chinook Jargon, 11.24(1-246.—Origin of certain Indian words, 1.25.—Remarks on onomatopoeia, 11.26-27.—Rise and progress of the written language of tho Chinook Jargon, 1.28.— Changes in the language, with vocabulary, 11. 28-35.—Some words in Yakama, with a resemblance to the Jargon, 11.36-40.—Words in the NiskwalU having some resemblance to the Chinook Jargon, 1. 41.—Some words from the Cree. 1.42.—A list of verbs found in the Jargon, alphabetically arranged, 1. 42.—Adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, and interjections, II. 51-54.—List of thepriucipal adjectives, 11.55- 59.—Grammatical construction of tho Chinook Jargon, 11.61-03.—Comparison of languages (20 words and phrases) in Tlaoquatch and Nootka, with the Columbian and Chinook, 11.63J-64.— Cree words in theJargon, 11.65-74.—Ontheposi- tion of words, 1.75.—Remarks on the translation of abstract words, 11. 76-79.—The alphabet, 11. 80-85.—Partial list of compound words, alphabetically arranged, 11.86-92—Inflections, 11.93- 96—Adjectives, 11. 96-98.—General rules on tenses, 11. 98-112.—Personal pronouns, 11. 113- 122.—Numerals, 11.123-124. The Chee-Chinook language | or | Chinook Jargon. Ju | IX | parts. | Part III. | English-Chinook dictionary. | First edition. | By T. S. Bulmer, ably assisted by | the Revd. M. Eells, D.D., '& the Revd Pere Saint Onge, both missionaries to the Indians in Washington & Oregon states. Manuscript; title verso blank, 1 1. preface verso blank 1 1. special note for readers verso blank 11. "memos toguidethoreader"2 II.text alphabetically arranged by English words 11. 1-189, written on one side only, fol io. In possession of its author, who kindly loaned it to mo for examination. In his '' memos'' the author gives alistof lettersused to indicate the origin of the respective words G,RT,I, E,F, Ch. Yak., Chinook, Nootka, Indian, English, French, Chihalis, and Yakama; and a second list of persons from whom the words were obtained and localities in which they were used. "In my selection of the term Ghee-Chinook I merely intend to convey to students that it has its principal origin in the Old or Original Chinook language; and although it contains many other Indian words, as well as French CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. ii Bulmer (T. S.)—Continued. and English, yet it came forth from its mother as an hybrid, and as such has been bred and nourished as a nursling from the parent stem. Itherefore designate itac/teeornewChinook— the word chee being a Jargon word for lately, just now, new.'' [ ] Chinook Jargon dictionary. Part III. Chinook-English. Manuscript; 121 leaves, folio, written on one side only, interspersed with 40 blank leaves inserted for additions and corrections. In possession of its author. The dictionary occupies 106 leaves, and many of the words are followed by their equivalents in the languages from which they are derived, and the authority therefor. Following the dictionary are the following: Original Indian names of town-sites, rivers, mountains, etc., in the western parts of the State of Washington: Skokomish, 2 11.; Chemakum, Lower Chihalis, Duwamish, 11.; Chinook, 211.; miscellaueous, 2 11.—Names of various places in the Klamath and Modoc countries, 3 11.—Camping places and other localities around the Upper Klamath Lake, 5 11. [ ] Appendix to Buhner's Chinook Jargon grammar and dictionary. Manuscript, 11. 1-70,4°, in possession of its author. General phrases, as literal as possible, Chinook and English, 11. 6-26.—Detached sentences, H. 27-29.—Prayer in English, 11. 30-31; same in Jargon, 11.32-33.—"History"in English, 11.34-36; same in Jargon (by Mr. Eells), withinterlinear English translation, 11.37-43.— An address, in English, 11.44-46; same in Jargon, with interlinear EngBsh translation, 11.47- 53.—A sermon in English, 11. 54-55; same in Jargon, with interlinear English translation, 11. 56-61.—Address in Jargon to the Indians of Puget Sound, by Mr. Eells, with interlinear English .translation, 11. 62-66—Address "On Man," in English, 1.67; same in Jargon, with interlinear English translation, 11.68-70. [ J Part II | of | Bulmer's Appendix | to the Chee-Chinook | Grammar and Dictionary. Manuscript, 57 11. 4°, in possession of its author. Form of marriage, 11. 2-3.—Solemnization of the marriage service, 11.4-10. Theso two articles are in Jargon, with interlinear English translation.—Address, in English, 11.11-12; the same in Jargon, withinterlinear English translation, 11. 13-17.—"From Addison," in Jargon, with interlinear English translation, 11.18-19.—An oration in English, 1.20; the same in Twana by Mr. Eells, with interlinear English translation, 11. 21-22—A Twana tradition, by Mr. Eells, with interlinear English translation,! 23; the same in English, 11..24-25—Legends in Jargon, by Pere L. N. St. Onge, witfi interlinear English translation, 11.26-57. Bulmer (T. S.) — Continued. [ ] Special scientific notes. Manuscript, 11. 1-77,4°, in possession of its author. General remarks on Indian languages, 11.1- 3.—Origin of languages, 11. 4-11.— Scientific notes on the European and Asiatic languages, 11. 12-35.—American Indian languages, 11. 35- 63, includes remarks upon and examples in the Iroquois, Cherokee, Sahaptin, Algonkin, Nahuatl, Shoshone, Cree, Sioux, and Jargon.— List of words in tho Chinook Jargon the same as in Nitlakapamuk, 11.64-67.—Selish numerals 1-18, 1. 65.—List of tribes of Alaska and its neighborhood, 1.66.—Twana verbs, 1. 67.—Nisk- wally verbs, 1. 68— Clallam verbs. 1. 09. — Remarks on the Yakama, H. 70-77. [ ] The Christian prayers | in Chinook [Jargon]. Manuscript; 6111. 4°, in the possession of its author. Prayers in Chinook Jargon, 11.1-5.—Lessons 1-17 in Chinook Jargon, with English-headings, 11. 6-23.—List of special words adopted by Fathers Blanchet and Demers in connection with the service of the mass, 11.24-25.—Translation of the Chinook prayers into English, 11. 26-38.—Copy of a sermon preached by Rev. Dr. Eells to the Indians at Walla-Walla, with interlinear English translation, 11. 39-46. "Of the 97 words used, 46 are of Chinook origin, 17 Nootka, 3 Selish, 23 English, 2 Jargon, and 6 in French.—Articles of faith of the Congregational church at Skokomish, Washington, in the Jargon with interlinear English translation, 11.47-52.—Oration in Chinook Jargon with interlinear English translation,II. 53-54.—Prayers to God in English blank verse, 11. 55-56; the same in Jargon with interlinear English translation, II. 57-61. [Hymns, songs, etc., in the Chinook Jargon and other languages.] Manuscript; no title-page; text 77 leaves, 4°, in possession of its author. Songs, 1.1.—Song with music, 11.2-3.—School songs by Mr. Eells, 11. 4-5.—Songs from Dr. Boas, II. 6-12—Hymns by Mr. Eells, 11. 13-32. All the above are in Jargon with English translations. — Hymns in Niskwalli by Mr. Eells, 1. 33.—Hymns in Jargon by Pere St. Onge, 11.34-45.—Hymn in Yakama, by Pere St. Onge, 11.45-46; the same in English, 11.57-64— Yakama prose song by Father Pandosy, with French translation, 11.65-69.—Hymns in Jargon by Mr. Eells, 11.70-71 Hymn in Yakama with interlinear English translation, 11.72-73.—Song in English, 1.74; same in Siwash, 11.75-77. [The Lord's prayer in various Indian languages.] Manuscript; no title-page; text 24 unnumbered leaves, written on one side only, 4°. The Lord's prayerin Chinook Jargon, 1.1; in Yakama," 1. 2; in Micmac, 1. 3.—Ave Maria in Micmac, 1.3.—Lord's prayerin Penobscot,!. 4; 1 ^—^=*-| 12 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Bulmer (T. S.) — Continued. in Mareschite, 1.5; in Passamaqnoddy (two versions) 1.5; Micmac (ancient),1. 6; Montagnais, 1. 6; Abenaki, 11. 6-7; pure Mareschite, 1. 7; Snohomish, 1.7; Niskwalli, * 1.8; Clallam,* 1.9; Twana,'* 1.10; Sioux, 1.11; Flathead,* 1.12; Cascade,*! 12; TlaUam.l. 13; Huron, 1.13; Black- toot, 1.13; Abenaki, 1.14; Choctaw, 1.14; Ottawa, 1.14; Assiniboine, 1.15; Seneca, 1.15; Caughna- waga, 1. 15; 'other Micmac, 1. 16; Totonac, 1.16; Cora, 1.16; Mistek, * 1.17; Maya, * 1.17; Algonquin, * 1.22.—Hymn in Snohomish, 11.23-24. Those prayers marked with an asterisk are accompanied by an interlinear English trans- lation. The compiler of this paper informs me it is his intention to add one hundred other versions of the Lord's prayer, from the Californian and Mexican languages. In addition to the above papers, Dr. Bulmer is also the author of a number of articles appearing in Father Le Jeune's Kamloops Wawa, q. v. I am indebted to Dr. Bulmer for the notes upon which is based the following account: Thomas Sanderson Buhnerwas born in 1834, in Yorkshire, England. He was educated at Preston grammar school, Stokesley, and at Newton under Brow, was advanced under Rev. C. Cator and Lord Beresford's son at Stokesley, and afterwards was admitted a pupil of the York and Ripon diocesan college. He was appointed principal of Doncaster union agricultural schools, but soon after emigrated to New York. There he took charge, as head master, of General Hamilton's free school. Thence he went to Upper Canada and was appointed one of the professors in L'Assomption Jesuit College. From there he went to Rush Medical College and Lrnd University, Chicago; thence to the Ecole Normals, Montreal; thence to Toronto University, medical department. Later he con- tiuued his studies in the Ecole de Medecine and McGiU University, Montreal, and graduated in medicine at Victoria University. In 1868hecrossed to London, whence heproceeded to New Zealand, and was appointed superintendent of quarantine at Wellington. In Tasmania and Australia he held similar positions. His health failing, he went to Egypt, and later returned to England. The English climate not agreeing with him, he took,a tour of the Mediterranean ports. Returning to London, the Russian grippe attacked him, and he was warned to seek a new climate, He returned to Montreal, en route for the Rocky Mountains, where he sought Indian society for a considerable time. Finding winter disastrous to him, he proceeded to Utah in search of health. For tbe last two years he has been engaged in writing up Ilia Chinook books, as well as completing his Egyptian Rites and Ceremonies, in which he has been assisted by English Egyp. tologists. Dr. Bulmer is a member of several so6ieties in England and America and the author of a number of works on medical and scientific subjects. Bureau of Ethnology: These words following a title or within parentheses after a note indicate that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of tbe Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D. C. Buschmann (Johann Carl Eduard). Die- Volker uud Sprachen Neu-Mex- iko's und der Westseite des britischen Nordamerika's, dargestellt von Hrn. Buschmann. In Konigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin, ■ Abhandlungen, aus dem Jahre 1857, pp. 209-414, Berlin, 1858,4°. A few words, of Chinook and Cathlascon (from Sconler), pp. 373-374.—Vocabulary of several Indian languages compared with the pseudo-Chinook (Cathlascon?) from Scouler, pp. 375-378. . Issued separately with title-page as follows: Die Volker und Sprachen | Neu- Mexico's | und | der Westseite | des | britischen Nordamerika's | dargestellt | von | Job. Carl Ed. Buschmann. | Aus den Abhandlungen der konigl. Akade- mie der Wissenschaften | zu Berlin 1857. | Berlin | gedruckt in der Buchdruck- erei der konigl. Akademie | der Wissenschaften | 1858. | In Commission bei F. Diimmler's Verlags-Buchhandlung. Cover title as above, title as above verso notice 1 1. text pp. 209-404, Inhalts-Ubersicht pp-405-413, Verbesserungen p. 414,4°. Linguistic contents as under title next above. Copies seen: Astor,Congress, Eames, Pilling, Trumbull. The copy at the Fischer sale, catalogue no. 270, brought 14s.; at the Field sale, catalogue no. 235, 75 cents; priced by Leclerc, 1878,no. 3012,12 fr. and by Triibner, 1882,15«. —— Die Spuren der aztekischen Sprache iin nordlicben Mexico und hoheren amerikanisehen Norden. Zugleich eine Musterung der Volker und Sprachen des nordlichen Mexico's und der Westseite Nordamerika's von Guadalaxara an bis zum Eismeer, Von Joh, Carl Ed, Buschmann. In KBnigliche Akad, der Wiss. zu Berlin, Abhandlungen aus dem Jabre 1854,zweiter Supp.- Band, pp. 1-819 (forms the whole volume), Berlin, 1859,4°. List of words in the Waiilatpa, Molele.Wat- lala, two dialects of the Chinook, and Calapuya, pp, 020-625.—Supplementary vocabulary of the Chinuk and Calapuya (from Parker, Scouler, Rafinesque, and Gallatin), pp. 635-626.—Lord's prayerin Chinook (from Duflot de Mafias), p, 626. Issued separately with title-page as follows: *MM CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 13 Buschmann (J. C. E.) — Continued. Die | Spuren der aztekischen Sprache | im nordlichen Mexico | und hiiheren amerikanischen Norden. | Zugleich | eine Mnsterung der Volker und Sprachen | des nordlichen Mexico's | und derWestseiteNordamerika's | vonGua- dalaxara an bis zum Eismeer. | Von | Job. Carl Ed. Buschmann. | Berlin. | Gedruckt in der Buchdruck- erei der Konigl. Akademie | derWissen- schaften. | 1859. Half-title verso blank 1 1. general title of the series verso blank 11. title as above verso blank 1 1. abgekiirtze Inhalts-iibersicht pp. vii-xii, Buschmann (J. C. E.) — Continued, text pp. 1-713, Einleitung.jn das geographische Register pp. 714-718, geographischo Register pp. 718-815. vermiachteNachweisungenpp. 816- 818, Verbesserungen, p. 819,4°. Linguistic contents as undert it le next above. Copies seen: Astor, Brinton. Eames, Maison- neuve, Pilling, Quaritch, Smithsonian, Trum- buU. Published at 20 Marks. An uncut half-morocco copy was sold at the Fischer sale, catalogue no. 269, to Quaritch, for 21. lis.; the latter prices two copies, catalogue no. 12552, one 21.2s. the other 21.10s.; the Pinart copy, catalogue no. 178, brought 9 fr.; Koehler, catalogue no. 440, prices it 13 M. 50 pf.; priced again by Quaritch, no. 30037,21. c. See Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) Youth's. Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) Cascade: Hymns Sentences Lord's prayer Prayer Catechism: Chinook Jargon See Demers (M.) et at. Cathlascon: i Vocabulary See Buschmann (J. C. E.) Vocabulary Scouler (J.) Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) Words Buschmann (J. C. E.) Words Latham (R. G.) Catlin (George). A descriptive catalogue | of | Catlin's Indian collection, | containing | portraits, landscapes, costumes^, &c, | and | representations of the manners and customs | of the | North American Indians. | Collected and painted entirely by Mr. Catlin, during eight years' travel amongst. | forty-eight tribes, mostly speaking different languages. | Also | opinions of the press in England, France, and the United States. | London: | published by the author, | at his Indian collection, No, 6, Waterloo place. | 1848. Title verso names of printers 1 1. note and certificates pp. 3-7, text pp. 8-92,8°. Proper names of a number of individuals in various North American languages, among them a few of the Chinook. Copies seen: Harvard, Wellesley. Priced by Maisonneuve & co. in 1889,2 fr. The descriptive catalogue is repriuted in the various editions of Catlin's Notes of eight years' travel and residence in Europe, for titles of whieh see below. North and"South American Indiaus. | Catalogue | descriptive and instruc- | Catlin (G.) — Continued, tive | of | Catlin's | Indian Cartoons. | . Portraits, types, and customs [sic]. | 600 paintings in oil, | with | 20,000 full length figures | illustrating their various games, religious ceremonies, and | other customs, [ and | 27 canvas paintings | of | Lasalle's discoveries. | New York: | Baker & Godwin, Printers, | Printing-house square, | 1871. Abridged title on cover, title as above verso blank 1 1. remarks verso note 1 1. text pp. 5-92, certificates pp. 93-99,8°. Linguistic contents as in edition of 1848, titled next above. Copies seen: Astor, Congress, Eames, Wellesley, Wisconsin Historical Society. The Catlin Indian collection, containing portraits, landscapes, costumes, &c., and representations of the manners and customs of the North American Indians. Presented to the Smithsonian Institution by Mrs. Thomas Harrison, of Philadelphia, in 1879. A descriptive catalogue. By George Catlin, the artist. In Ehees (W. J.), Visitor's guide to the Smithsonian Institution and United States National Museum, in Washington, pp. 70-89, Washington, 1887,8°. Linguistic contents as under title next above, p. 76. Copies seen: Pilling, Powell. Part V. The George Catlin Indian gallery in the National Museum (Smithsonian Institution), with memoir and statistics. By Thomas Donaldson. In Annual Report of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution * * * July, 1885, part 2 (half-title 11. pp. i-vii, 3-939),Washington, 1886,8°. (" J 14 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Catlin (G.)—Continued. Descriptive catalogue of Indian portraits (pp. 13-230) includes the Chinook, p. 99. Issued separately, with title-page as follows: The. | George Catlin Indian gallery | in the | U. S. National Museum |(Smithsonian Institution), | with | memoir and statistics. [ By | Thomas Donaldson. | From the Smithsonian report for 1885. | Washington: | Government printing office. | 1887. Title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. i-iii, illustrations pp. v-vii, text pp. 3-915, indexLpp. 917- 939,8°. Linguistic contents as under titlenext above. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Smithsonian. Issued also with title-page as follows: The | George Catlin | Indian gallery, | in the | U. S. National Museum, | (Smithsonian Institution.) | With memoir and statistics. | By Thomas Donaldson. | Washington, D. C. | W. H. Lowder- lnilk & Co. 11888. Title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. i-iii, illustrations pp. v-vii, text pp. 3-915, index pp. 917- 939,8°. Linguistic contents as under titles above. Copies seen: Lowdermilk.. Catlin's notes | of | eight years' travels and residence | In Europe, | with his | North American Indian collection : | with anecdotes and incidents of the travels and adventures of three | different parties of American Indians whom he introduced | to the courts of | England, France and Belgium. | In two volumes octavo. | Vol. I [-II]. | With numerous illustrations. | New-York: | Burgess, Stringer &co., 222 Broadway. | 1848. 2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. v-ix, contents pp. xi- xvi, text pp. 1-296; half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso copyright 11. contents pp. v-xii, text pp. 1-325, appendix pp. 327-336,8°. A descriptive catalogue of Catlin's Indian collection (vol. 1, pp. 248-296) includes proper names in a number of Indian languages, among them a few of the Chinook, p. 264. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology,Powell, Watkinson. At the Fischer sale a copy, no. 350, brought 2s.; the Field copy, no. 305, sold for $2.50. Catlin's notes | of | eight years' travels and residence | In Europe, | with his | North American Indian col- j lection: I with anecdotes and incidents | Catlin (G.) — Continued, of the travels and adventures of three | different parties of American Indians whom he introduced | to the courts of | England,France,and Belgium. | In two volumes octavo. | Vol. I[-II]. | With numerous illustrations. | New York: | published by the author. | To be had at all the bookstores. | 1848. 2 vols.: pp.i-xvi, 1-296; i-xii, 1-336; plates, 8°. Linguistic contents as under title next above. Copies seen: Congress. Catlin's notes | of | eight years' travels and residence | in Europe, | with his | North American Indian collection. | With | anecdotes and incidents of the travels and adventures of | three different parties of American Indians whom he | introduced to the courts of | England, France, and Belgium. | In two volumes, octavo. | Vol. I[-H]. | With numerous illustrations. | Second edition. | London: | published by the author, | at his Indian collection, No. 6, Waterloo place. | 1848. 2vols.: half-title verso blank-11. frontispiece 11. titleverso names of printers 11. preface pp- v-ix, contents pp. xi-xvi, text pp. 1-202, appen- . dix pp. 203-247, catalogue pp. 248-296; half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names of printers 1 1. contents pp. v-xii, text pp. 1-325, appendix pp.327-336, plates, 8°. Linguistic contents as undertitles above. Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, Lenox, Wisconsin Historical Society. Some copies, otherwise as above, have "Third edition" (Congress); others "Fourthedition" (Bureau of Ethnology, Lenox), both with the same date. Adventures | of the | Ojibbewayand Ioway Indians | in | England, France, and Belgium; | being notes of | eight years' travels and residence inEurope | with his | North American Indian collection, | by Geo. Catlin. | In two volumes. | Vol. I [-II]. | With numerous Engravings. | Third edition. | London: | published by the author, | at his Indian collection, no. 6, Waterloo place. | 1852. 2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-ix, contents pp. xi-xvi, text pp. 1-296; half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names of printers 1 1. contents pp. v-xii, text pp. 1-325, appendices pp. 327-336,8°. A reprint of Notes of eight years' travels in Europe. —= -—— CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. Catlin (G.) —Continued. Linguistic contents as under titles above. Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenseum, Bureau of Ethnology, Wisconsin Historical Society. George Catlin, painter, born in Wilkesbarre, I Pa., in 1796, died in Jersey City, N. J., Decem- ber23,1872. He studied law at Litchfield, Conn., but after a few years' practice went to Philadelphia and turned his attention to drawing and painting. As an artist he was entirely self- taught. In 1832 he went to the Far West and spent eight years among the Indians of Yellowstone River, Indian Territory, Arkansas, and Florida, painting a unique series of Indian portraits and pictures, which attracted much attention on their exhibition both in this country and in Europe. Among these were 470 full- length portraits and a large number of pictures illustrative of Indian life and customs, most of which are now preserved in the National Museum, Washington. Tn 1852-1857 Mr. Catlin traveled in South and Central America, after which he lived in Europe until 1871, when he returned to the United States. One hundred and twenty-six of his drawings illustrative of Indian life were at the Philadelphia exposition of 1876.—Appleton's Cyclop, of Am. JSiog. Chaltin (Rev. W. C.) See Gill (J. K.) Chamberlain (Alexander Francis). Words of Algonkian origin [in the Chinook Jargon]. In Science, vol. 18, pp. 260-261, New York, 1891,4°. (Pilling.) A list of words found in tbe Jargon vocabu" laries of Winthrop, Gibbs, and Hale, which are of Algonquian origin. The Eskimo race and language. Their origin and relations. By A. F. Chamberlain, B. A. In Canadian Lust. Proc. third series, vol. 6, pp. 261-337, Toronto, 1889,8°. Comparative Eskimo and Indian vocabularies (pp. 318-322) contain a number of Chinook and Watlala words (from Tolmie and Dawson, and from Hale), pp. 318-320. Notes on the Chinook Jargon as spoken in the Kootenay District, South Eastern British Columbia, by A. F. Chamberlain, M. A. Ph. D. Manuscript, 7 unnumbered pages, written on one side only; in possession of its author, who has kindly sent it to me for inspection. A vocabulary of 150 Jargon words. Alexander Francis Chamberlain was born at Kenninghall, Norfolk, England, Jan. 12,1865, and came to New York with his parents in 1870, removing with them to Canada in 1874. He matriculated from the Collegiate Institute, Peterboro, Ontario, ?nto the University of Toronto, in 1882, from" 'vnich institution he graduated with honors in modern languages and ethnology in 1886, From 1887 to 1890 he was Chamberlain (A. F.) — Continued. fellow in modern languages in University College, Toronto, and in 1889. received the degree of M. A. from his alma mater. In 1890 he was appointed fellow in anthropology in Clark University, Worcester, Mass., where he occupied himself with studies in the Algonquian languages and the physical anthropology of America. In June, 1890, he went to British Columbia, where, until the following October, he was engaged in studying the Kootenay Indians under the auspices of the British Association for the Advancement of Science. A summary of the results of these investigations appears in the proceedings of the association for 1892. A dictionary and grammar of the Kootenay language, together with a collection of texts of myths, are also being proceeded with. In 1892 Mr. Chamberlain received from Clark University the degree of Ph. D. in anthropology,, his thesis being: "The Language of the Mississa- gas of Skugog: A contribution to the Linguistics of the Algonkian Tribes of Canada," embodying the results of his investigations of these Indians. Mr. Chamberlaiu, whose attention was, early in life, directed to philologic and ethnologic studies, has contributed to the scientific journals of America, from time to time, articles on subjects connected with linguistics and folklore, especially of the Algonquian tribes. He has also been engaged in the study of the Low-German and French Canadian dialects, the results of which will shortly appear. Mr. Chamberlain is a member of several of the learned societies of America and Canada and fellow of the American Association for the Advancement of Science. In 1892 he was appointed lecturer in anthropology at Clark University. Charencey (Comte Charles Felix Hya- cinthe Gouhier de). [Review of] An international idiom, a manual of the Oregon trade languages or Chinook Jargon, by Mr. Horatio Hale/ In Le Museon, vol. 10, pp. 273-274, Louvain, 1891,8°. Chase (Pliny Earle). On the radical significance of numerals. In American Philosoph. Soc. Proc.voLlO, pp. 18-23, Philadelphia, 1869,8°. Examples in several Indian languages, among them the Chinook Jargon (from Gibbs). Chinook. The Chinook Jargon, and English and French equivalent forms. In the Steamer Bulletin, San Francisco, June 21,1858. (*) Contains an unarranged vooabulary of 354 words and phrases. Title and note from Gibbs'sDictionary of the Chinook Jargon. For notice of a reprint see Hazlitt (W. C.) Chinook [Jargon] dictionary. See Coones (S. F.) r SS8BH5SSB 16 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Chinook. [Vocabularies of some of the Indian languages of northwest America.] Manuscript, 2 vols. 82 pages folio. Bought for the Library of Congress, Washington, D. C, at the sale of the library of the late Mr. Geo. Brinley, the catalogue of which says they came "from the library of Dr. John Pickering, to whom, probably, they were presented by Mr. Duponceau. They were presented ' to Peter S. Duponceau, esq., with J. K. Townshend's respects. Fort Vancouver, Columbia River, September, 1835.'" Contains linguistic material relating to a number of the peoples in the vicinity of Puget Sound, amongst them a Chinook vocabulary, of 194 words and phrases, and a Chinook Jargon vocabulary, "used as the means of communication between the Indians and whites on Columbia River," of .146 words. Chinook: Classification See Bates (H. W.) Classification Domeuech (E. H. D.) Classification Gairdner (—) Classification Gallatin (A.) Classification Keane (A. H.) Classification Jehan (L. F.) Classification Latham (R. G.) Classification Priest (J.) Classification Powell (J. W.) Classification Rafinesque (C. S.) Classification SaycetA.H.) Dictionary Boas (F.) Dictionary Gibbs (G.) General discussion Bancroft (H. H.) . General discussion Beach (W. W.) General discussion Berghaus (H.) General discussion Brinton (D. G.) General discussion Duncan (D.) General discussion Eells (M.) General discussion Featherman (A.) General discussion Gallatin (A.) General discussion Hale (H.) General discussion Sproat (G. M.) General discussion Whymper (F.) Geographic names Gibbs (G.) Grammar Boas (F.) Grammatic comments Gallatin (A.) Grammatic comments Hale (H.) Grammatic treatise Boas (F.) Grammatic treatise Miiller (F.) Hymns Blauchet (F. N.) Hymns Tate (C. M.) Legends Boas (F.) Lord's prayer Bergholtz (G. F.) Lord's prayer Duflot de Mofras (E.) Numerals Boas (F.) Numerals Duflot de Mofras (E.) Numerals Eells (M.) Numerals Haldeman (S. S.) Numerals Ross (A.) Prayers Blanchet (F. N.) Proper names Catlin (G.) Proper names Stanley (J. M.) Sentences Franchere (G.) "^ Songs Boas (F.) Chinook Songs Texts Tribal names Tribal names Tribal names Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Continued. See Eells (M.) Boas (F.) Vocabulary AVords Words Words Words Words Words Words Words Words Words Words Words Words Chinook Jargon. In American Homes, illustrated, vol. 4, pp. 338-339, Chicago, 1873,8°. (Lenox.) Contains specimens of a dialogue and the Lord's prayer with English word for word' translation. Chinook Jargon: Bible history See Durieu (P.) Boas (F.) Douglass (J.) Haines (E. M.) Anderson (A. C.) Buschmann (J. C. E.) Chinook. Domenech (E. H. D.) Dttnn (J.) Franchere (G.) Gallatin (A.) Hale (H.) Knipe (C.) Montgomerie (J. E.) Pinart (A. L.) Priest (J.) Rafinesque (C. S.) Ross (A.) Scouler (J.) Shortess (R.) Tolmie (W. F.) Tolmie (W. F.) And Dawson (G. M.) Wabass (W. G.) Bancroft (H. H.) Brinton (D. G.) Buschmann (J. C. E.) Chamberlain (A. F.) Daa (L.K.) Grasserie (R. de la). Haines (E. M.) Latham (R. G.) Platzmann (J.) Pott (A. F.) Smith (S. B.) Tylor(E.B.) Youth's. Bible history Bible stories Catechism -Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary (Mss. (3d ed. 1856) (3d ed. 1862?) (4th ed. 1868) (6th ed. 1873?) (6th ed. 1878) (7th ed.1879) 1891) (1891) (1871) (1862) (1865) (1871?) (1873) (1877?) (1883) (1887) St. Onge (L.N.) LeJeune(J. M. R.) Demers (M.) et al. Blanchet (F. N.) Blanchet (F. N.) Blanchet (F. N) Blanchet (F. N.) Blanchet (F. N.) Blanchet (F. N.) - Bulmer (T. S.) Coones (S. F.) Demers (M.) et al. Dictionary, Dictionary, Dictionary, Dictionary, Dictionary, Dictionary, Dictionary. CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. Chinook Jargon — Con Dictionary (1887) Dictionary (1889) Dictionary (1886) Dictionary (1892) Dictionary (Mss. 1893) Dictionary (Mss. 1884) Dictionary (Wash., 1863) Dictionary (N. Y.,1863,8°) Dictionary (N. Y., 1863,4°) Dictionary (9th ed. 1882) Dictionary (10th ed. 1884) Dictionary (11th ed. 1887) Dictionary (12th ed. 1889) Dictionary (13th ed. 1891) Dictionary (1880) Dictionary (1858) Dictionary (1890) Dictionary (1872) Dictionary (1886) Dictionary (1892) Dictionary (1853) Dictionary (1888) Dictionary (Mss. 1893) Dictionary (1865) Dictionary (1889) Dictionary (1860) General discussion General discussion General discussion General discussion General discussion General discussion General discussion General discussion General discussion General discussion Geueral discussion General discussion General discussion x General discussion Grammar Grammatic comments Grammatic comments Grammatic comments Grammatic treatise Grammatic treatise Hymn book Hymn book Hymns Hymns Hymns Hymns Hymns Hymns Hymns Legends Lord's prayer Lord's prayer Lord's prayer Lord's prayer Lord's prayer Lord's prayer Lord's prayer Lord's prayer Lord's prayer CHIN 2 tinned. Dictionary. Dictionary. Durieu (P.) Durieu (P.) Eells (M.) Everette (W. E.) Gibbs (G.) Gibbs (G.) Gibbs (G.) Gill (J. K.) Gill (J. K.) Gill (J. K.) Gill (J. K.) Gill (J. K.) Good(J.B.) Guide. Hale (H.) ' Langvein (H. L.) LeJeune(J.M.R.) LeJeune(J.M.R.) Lionnet (—) Probsch (T. W.) St. Onge (L. N.) Stuart (G.) Tate (C. M.) Vocabulary. Bancroft (H. H.) Beach (VT.W.) Clough (J. C.) Drake (S. G.) Eells (M.) Gatschet (A. S.) Haines (E. M.) Hale (H.) Nicoll (E. H.) Reade (J.) Sproat (G.M.) Swan (J. G.) Western. Wilson (D.) Bulmer (T.S.) Crane (A.) Eells (M.) Hale (H.) •Demers (M.) et al. Hale (H.) Eells (M.) Le Jeune (J. M. R.) Bulmer (T. S.) Demers (M.) et at. Everette (W. E.) Eells (M.) Hale (H.) Macleod (X. D.) St. Onge (L. N.) St. Onge (L. N.) Bancroft (H.H.) Bolduc (J. B.Z.) Bulmer (T.S.) Chinook. Dictionary. Eells (M.) Everette (W. E.) Gibbs (G.) Gill (J. K.) Chinook Jargon- Lord's prayer Lord's prayer Lord's prayer Lord's prayer Numerals Numerals Numerals Numerals Numerals Numerals Numerals Numerals Numerals Numerals Numerals Numerals Numerals Numerals Periodical Prayers Prayers Prayers Primer Review Review Review Review Review Sermons Sermons Sermons Sentences Sentences Sentences Sentences Sentences Sentences Sentences Sentences Sentences Sentences Songs Songs Ten commandments Text Text Text Text Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary 17 - Continued. Good (J. B.) See Hale (H.) Marietti (P.) Nicoll (E. F.)^ Cox (R.) Dictionary. Gill (J. K.) Good (J. B.) Haines (E.M.) Hale (H.) Hazlitt(W. C.) Montgomerie(J.E.) Nicoll (E. H.) Palmer (J.) Parker (S.) Richardson (A. D.) Stuart (G.) Swan (J. G.) Le Jeune(J.M.R.) Bulmer (T. S.) Demers (M.) et al. Tate (C. M.) Le Jeune (J. M. R.) Charencey (H. de). Crane (A.) Leland (C. G.) Reade (J.) Western. Eells (M.) Hale (H.) New. Allen (A.) Chinook. Dictionary. Eells (M.) Green (J. S.) Hale (H.) Leland (C. G.) Macfie (M.) Macdonald (D.G. F.) Stuart (G.) Bulmer (T. S.) Crane (A.) Everette (W. E.) Bulmer (T. S.) Demers (M.) et al. Dictionary. Eells (M.) Anderson (A. C.) Armstrong (A.N.) Belden (G. P.) Bolduc (J. B. Z.) Chamberlain(A.F.) Chinook. Cox (R.) Dictionary. Eells (M.) Everette (W. E.) Gallatin (A.) Gibbs (G.) Guide. Haines (E. M.) Hale (H.) Hazlitt (W. C.) Le Jeune (J. M. R.) i*#~ 18 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Chinook Jargon — Continued. Vocabulary See Lionnet (—) Vocabulary Macdonald"(D.G. F.) Vocabulary Palmer (J.) Vocabulary Parker (S.) Vocabulary Richardson (A. D.) Vocabulary Ross (A.) Vocabulary Schoolcraft (H. K.) Vocabulary . Scouler (J.) Vocabulary Sproat(G.M.) Vocabulary Swan (J. G.) Vocabulary Vocabulary. Vocabulary Winthrop (T.) "Words Chamberlain (A.F.) Words Chase (P. E.) Words Crane (A.) Words Eells (M.) . Words Latham (R. G.) Words Leland (C. G.) Words Norris (P. W.) Words Tylor (E. B.) Words Wilson (D.) Clakama: Proper names Sentences Vocabulary Classification: Chinook See Bates (H. W.) Chinook Domenech (E. H. D.) Chinook Gairdner (—) Chinook Gallatin (A.) Chinook Jehan (L. F.) Chinook Keane (A. H.) Chinook Latham (R. G.) Chinook Priest (J.) Chinook Powell (J. W.) Chinook Rafinesque (C. S.) Chinook Sayce (A. H.) Clatsop: Vocabulary Vooabulary Vocabulary See Stanley (J. M.) Gatschet(A. S.) Gatschet(A. S.) Vocabulary Clough (James Cresswell). On | the existence | of | mixed languages | being | an examination of the fundamental axioms of the | foreign school of modern philology, more | especially as applied to the English | Prize Essay | by | James Cresswell dough | fellow of the Royal historical society [ member of the English dialect society; assistant at Huddersfield college | late modern master at Liverpool college | [Greek quotation, one line] | London | Longmans, Green, and co | 1876 | All rights reserved Half-title verso names of printers 1 1. title verso blank 11. preface p. [v], statements etc. p. [vi], contents pp. [vii]-viji, text pp. 1-125, postscript p. JT26J,8°. See Emmons (G. F.) Hale (H.) Lee (D.) and Frost (J.H.) Semple (J. E.) Clough (J. C.) -- Continued. Some account of the Chinook Jargon, with 1 specimen words (from Wilson's Prehistoric '. man), pp. 7-9. Copies seen: Eames. Comtuete Chinook Jargon. See Probsch (T.W.) Complete dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. (1856-1862.) See Blanchet (F.N.) Complete dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. (1882.) See Gill (J. K.) Congress: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the com- I piler in the Library of Congress, Washington, D.C. [Coones (S. F.)] Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon | as spoken on | Puget sound and the northwest, | with | original Indian names for prominent places | and localities with their meanings, | historical sketch, etc. [ Published by | Lowman & Hanford stationery & printing co., | Seattle, Wash. [1891.] Cover title: Chinook Dictionary | and | original Indian names | of | western Washington. | [Picture.] | Lowman & Hanford | stationery & | printing company. [1891.] Cover title, title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. [3^4], p. 5 blank, key to pronunciation p. [6], numerals p. [7], text pp. 9-38,24°. "Numerals', p. [7].—Chinook-English dictionary alphabetically arranged, pp. 9-32.—English conversation and interrogatories, answered in Chinook, pp. 33-34.—The oath, p. 34. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. Cornell: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler, belonging to the library of that university, Ithaca, N. Y. Cox (Ross). Adventures | on the | Columbia river, | including | the narrative of a residence | of six years on tbe western side of | the Rocky mountains, | among | various tribes of Indians | hitherto unknown: | together with | a journey across the American continent. | By Ross Cox. | In two volumes. | Vol. I[-II]. | London: | Henry Colburn and Richard Bentley, | New Burlington street. | 1831. 2 vols.: title verso name of printer 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii-ix, introduction pp. xi-xx, contents'of vol. 1 pp. xxi- xxiv, text pp. 1-388; title verso name of printer CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 19 2ox (R.) —Continued. i 11. contents pp. v-viii; text pp. 1-383, appendix pp. 395-400,8°. Numerals 1-12.20, and a short vocabulary (7 words and 3 phrases) in Chinook Jargon, vol. 2, p. 134. Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenteum, British Museum, Congress. Sabin's Dictionary, no. 17267, mentions a u second edition, London, 1832,8°''. The | Columbia river; | or, | scones I and adventures | during | a residence of six years on the western | side of the Rocky mountains | among | various tribes of Indians | hitherto unknown; | together with | a journey across the American continent. | By Ross Cox. | *' Iu two volumes. | Vol. I[-II]. | Third i edition. | London: | Henry Colburn and Richard Bentley. | New Burlington street. | 1832. 2 vols.: title verso names of printers 1 1. ^dedication verso blank L 1. preface pp. v-vi, |p introduction pp. vii-xvi, contents pp. xvii-xx, ■ text pp. 1-333; title verso names of printers 11. contents pp. iii-vi, text pp. 1-350,8°. Linguistic contents as under title next above, vol. 2, pp. 117-118. Copies seen: Greely. Adventures | on the | Columbia river, | including | the narrative of a residence | of six years on the western side of | the Rocky mountains, | among | various tribes of Indians | hitherto unknown: | together with | a journey across the American continent. | By Ross Cox. | New York: | printed and published by J. & J. Harper, 82 Cliff-street. | And sold by the principal booksellers throughout the United States. | 1832. Title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vi, i ut reduction pp. vii-x, contents pp. xi-xv, text pp. 25-331, appendix pp. 333-335,8°. Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp.225-226. Copies seen: Bancroft, Congress, Harvard, Mallet, Pilling. Crane (Agnes). The Chinook Jargon. In the Brighton Herald, no. 4883, p. 4, Brighton, England, July 12,1890, folio. (Pilling.) A review of Hale (H.), Manual of the Oregon trade language. It occupies a column and a half of the Herald and contains a number of Jargon words with their derivations, a brief Crane (A.) — Continued. outline of phonetics and grammar of the language, and one verse of a song, with English translation. Curtin (Jeremiah). [Words, phrases, and sentences in the Wasko language.] Manuscript, pp. 77-328,4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded at Warm Spring, Oregon, in 1884, in a copy of Powell's In traduction to the Study of Indian Languages, second edition. The Bureau alphabet is used. Of the schedules, nos. 1-4,6-8,16, 18-29 are well filled; nos. 5,10,12-14, and 17 partially so; and nos. 9,11,15, and 30 have no entries. Jeremiah Curtin was born in Milwaukee, Wis., about 1835. He had little education in childhood, but at tbe age of twenty or twenty- one prepared himself to enter Phillips Exeter Academy, made extraordinary progress, and soon entered Harvard College, where he was graduated in 1863. By this time he had become noted among his classmates and acquaintances for his wonderful facility as alinguist. Onleav- ing college he had acquired a good knowledge of French, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Roumanian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Icelandic, Gothic, German, andFinnish, besides Greekand Latin. He had also made considerable progress in Hebrew, Persian, and Sanskrit, and was beginning to speak Russian. When Admiral Lissofsky's fleet visited this country, in 1864, Curtin became acquainted with the officers and accompanied the expedition on its return to Russia. In St. Petersburg he obtained employment as a translator of polyglot telegraphic dispatches, but he was presently appointed by Mr. Seward to the office of secretary of the United States legation, and he held this place till 1868. During thisperiod he became familiar with the Polish, Bohemian, Lithuanian, Lettish, and Hungarian languages, and made a beginning in Turkish. From 1868 till 1877 he traveled in eastern Europe and in Asia, apparently in the service of the Russian government. In 1873, at the celebration atPragueof the 500th anniversary of the birth of John Huss, he delivered the oration, speaking with great eloquence in the Bohemian language. Duringjiis travels in the Danube country he learued to speak Slavonian, Croatian, Servian, and Bulgarian. He lived for some time in the Caucasus, where he learned Mingrelian, Abkasian, and Armenian. At the beginning of the Russo- Turkish war in 1877, he left the Russian dominions, and, after a year in London, returned to h is native country. Since then he has been studying the languages of the American Indians and has made valuable researches under the auspices of Maj. John W. Powell and the Bureau of Ethnology. He is said to be acquainted with more than fifty languages.— Appleton's Cyclop, of Am. Siog. \ 20 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE D. Daa (Ludwig Kristensen). On the affinities between the languages of the northern tribes of the old and new continents. By Lewis Kr. Daa, Esq., of Christiania, Norway. (Read December the 20th.) . In Philological Soc. [of London] Trans. 1856, pp. 251-294, London [1857], 8°. (Congress.) Comparative tables showing affinities between Asiatic and American languages, pp. 264-285, contain words from many North American languages, among them a few of the Tschinuk. Dawson (Dr. George Mercer). See Tolmie (W. F.) and Dawson (G. M.) George Mercer Dawson was born at Pictou, NovaSeotia,Augustl, 1849, and is the eldest son of Sir William Dawson, principal of McGill University, Montreal. He was educated at McGill College and the Royal School of Mines; held the Duke of Cornwall's scholarship, given by the Prince of Wales; and took the Edward Forbes medal in palaeontology and the Mur- chison medal in geology. He was appointed geologist and naturalist to Her Majesty's North American Boundary Commission in 1873, and atthe close of the commission's work, in 1875, he published a report under the title of " Geology and Resources of the Forty-ninth Parallel." In July, 1875, he received au appointment on the geologicalsurvey of Canada. From 1875 to 1879 he was occupied in the geological survey and exploration of British Columbia, and subsequently engaged in similar work both in the Northwest Territory andBritish Columbia. Dr. Dawson is the author of numerous papers on geology, natural history, and ethnology, published in the Canadian Naturalist, Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, Transactions of the Royal Societjr of Canada, etc. He was in 1887 selected to take charge of the Yukon expedition. Definitio Dogmatis . . . Jargon Tchinook. See Demers (M.) De Horsey (Lieut. Algernon Frederick Rous). See Montgomerie (J. E.) and De Horsey (A.F.R.) [Demers (Bishop Modesto).] Definitio Dogmatis Immaeulatse Conceptionis Beatissimse Virginis Mari® | a SS. D. N. Pio PP. IX. Second heading: Eadom in earn Lin- guam translata qu» vulgo Jargon Tchinook | dicitur, quaeque obtinet in tota Oregonensi Provincia; | auctore Episcopo Vancouveriensis Insults. Colophon; Typis Joannis Maria Shea, Neo Eboracensis. [I860?] No title-page, headings only; text 1 leaf verso blank, 12°. )emers (M.)—Continued. The dogma is first given in Latin, followed by the translation into the Chinook Jargon. Copies seen: Georgetown, Pilling. — Blanchet (F. N.) and St. Onge (L. N.) J. M. J. | Chinook [Jargon] | Dictionary, Catechism, | prayers and I hymns. \ Composed in 1838 & 1839 by | rt. rev. Modeste Demers. | Revised, corrected and completed, | in 1867 by | most rev. F. N. Blanchet. | With modifications and additions by | Rev. L. N. St. Onge Missionary | among the Yaka- mas and other Indian Tribes. | Montreal. | 1871. Cover title.- The | missionary's companion | on the | Pacific coast. | [Picture.] | [Three lines of scripture—Mat. xxiii. 19.] Cover title, frontispiece verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. plate 1 I. prefaco (by Father St. Onge, unsigned) pp. 7-9, text pp. 9-65, addenda p. 66, table' [of contents] p. 67, errata p. 68,16°. Short account of the origin of the Chinook Jargon, pp. 7-8.—Rules of the language, pp. 9- 10.—Of the nouns, pp. 11-12.—Orthography, p. 12.—Chinook [Jargon] dictionary (pp. 13-32) in double columns, underthefollowingheads, each alphabetically arranged by Jargon words: Nouns, pp. 13-22; Adjectives, pp. 23-25; Numbers, pp. 25-26; Pronouus, p. 26; Verbs, pp. 26- 29; Adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, and interjections, pp. 30-31 Appendix, pp. 31-32.— The Christian prayers in Chinook [Jargon], pp. 33-38. — Hymns (in Jargon with French headings), pp. 39-46 Catechism (in Jargon with English headings), pp. 47-65—Addenda [a Short vocabulary], p. 66. " The Chinook Jargon was invented by the Hudson Bay Company traders, who were mostly French Canadians. Having to trade with the numerous tribes inhabiting the countries west of the.Rocky Mountains, it was necessary to have a language understood by all. Hence, the idea of composing the Chinook Jargon. Fort Vancouver being the principal post, the traders of the twenty-nine forts belonging to the company, on the western slope, and the Indians from every part of that immense country, had to come to Vancouver for the trading season. They used to learn the Chinook and then teach it to others. In this manner it became universally known. " The two first missionaries to Oregon, Rev. I F. N. Blanchet, V. G., and his worthy companion, Rev. Mod. Demers, arrived from Canada to Vancouver on the 24th of November, 1838. They had to instruct numerons tribes of Indians, and the wives and children of the whites, who spoke only the Chinook. The two missionaries set to work to learn it, and in a few weeks Father Demers had mastered it and began to preach CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 21 Demers (M.) — Continued. " He composed a vocabulary which was very useful to other missionaries. He composed several canticles, which the Indians learned and sang with taste and delight. He also translated all the Christian prayers in the same language. " Such is the origin of the Chinook Jargon, which enabled the two first missionaries in the country to do a great deal of good anung the Indians and half-breeds. Tho invention of the Catholic Ladder, in April, 1839, by Very Rev. fE-Blanchet, and its [oral] explanation in Chinook, had a marvelous success and gave the Catholic missionaries a great superiority andprepouder- ance much envied by the missionaries belonging to other denominations. | Father Demers, afterwards Bishop of Van- I couvers Island, lias now gone to enjoy the reward of his great labours and apostolic zeal. ''-' It would be too bad to lose his Dictionary and I other Chinook works. So, Archbishop Blanchet, who has himself made a compendium of • I the Christian doctrine in the same language, has had the good inspiration to get the whole pub- 1:' lished with his corrections and additions."—■ Preface by Father St. Onge. Concerning the preparation and publication & of this work, Father St. Onge writes me as fol- ji lows: "Bishop Demers's little book, which was i? corrected by Archbishop Blanchet, was never printed. The archbishop gave me the manuscript, which I arranged. I made the spelling uniform and overhauled it completely. I was in the hospital at Montreal at the time, where i my bishop had sent me because of ill health. When I got a little stronger, time being hard to pass, I procured a small press, went to work and printed this Chinook book and the Yakama catechism. It was hard work for an invalid, and I made the dictionary as short as possible. " The Catholic Ladder, of which I send you a copy, was, as you suggest, published by Father Lacombe; but it is only an embellished edition of the Ladder invented by Archbishop Blanchet in April, 1839. The archbishop never printed any Chinook explanation of it, and in my preface to the Chinook Dictionary the word oral should have been included. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Trumbull, Wellesley. Modeste Demers, R. C. bishop, born in Canada, died in Vancouver's Island in 1871. He went to the Northwest Territory in 1838 and was engaged in missionary dnty among the I Indians until 1847, when he was consecrated bishop of Vancouver's Island. — Appleton's Cyclop, of Am. JBiog. Dickinson (—). See Everette (W. E.) Dictionary | of [ Indian Tongues | containing most of the words and terms I used in the | Tsimpseau, Hydah, & Chinook, | with'their meaning or equivalent I in the I English Language. I Dictionary — Continued. Published by Hibben & Carswell, | Victoria, V. I. | Printed at the office of the Daily Chronicle, | Government Street. | 1862. (*) Title 11. text pp. 1-15,16°. Hydah vocabulary, pp. 1-3. — Tsimpsean vocabulary, grammatic notes and phrases, pp. 3-10.—Chinook Jargon, pp. 11-15. Title from Dr. Franz Boas from copy in his possession. Dictionary | of | Indian tongues, | containing | Most of the Words and. Terms | used in the | Tshimpsean, Hydah, and Chinook, | with their meaning or equivalent | in the | English language. | Published by | Hibben & Carswell, | Victoria, V. I. j Printed at the British colonist office. | 1865. Cover title verso advertisement, no inside title, text pp. 1-14, sq. 16°. Chinook Jargon-English vocabulary, double columns, pp. 1-4.—Chinook examples (phrases and sentences), p. 5.— Hydah-English vocabulary, double columns, pp. 6-7.—English-Tshim- shean [sic] vocabulary, verbal conjugations, phrases and sentences, double columns, pp. 8- 14. Copies seen: Astor, Eames. Dictionary. A | dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Language, | Of the North Pacific Coast. | [Picture of an Indian.] | Published by T. N. Hibben & Co., | Victoria, B. C. | Colonist print—Victoria, B.C. [1871?] Cover title as above, no inside title, text pp. 1-29, advertisement on back cover, 8°. Chinook-English, pp.l-l 8.—English-Chinook, pp. 19-29.—Lord's prayer iu Jargon with interlinear English translation, -p. 29. Copies seen: Bancroft, Cornell, Eames, Trumbull, Wellesley. Forthemostpartareprint, with omissions, of Gibbs tG.), Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. Reprinted in: British Columbia; Report of the Hon. H. L. Langvein, C. B. Minister of Public Works, pp. 161-182, Ottawa, 1872, 8°. (Georgetown.) Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | or, [ Indian Trade Language | of the | north Pacific coast. | Victoria, B. (J.: | T. N. Hibben & co., publishers, | Government street. [1877?] Cover title: Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Language | of the | north Pacific coast. | [Picture.] | Victoria, B. C.: | Published by T. N. Hibben & Co., | Government Street. [1877?] 22 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Dictionary — Continued. - Cover title, title verso copyright notice (1877) and name of printer 11. text pp. 5-33,8°. Part I. Chinook-English, alphabetically arranged, pp. 5-23.—Part II. English Chinook, double columns, alphabetically arranged, pp. 23-33.—Lord's prayer iu Jargon, with interlinear English translation, p. 33. Copies seen.- Pilling. Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Language | of the | north Pacific coast. | Victoria, B. C. | T.N. Hibben & Co., publishers, | Government Street. | 1883. Cover title: New Edition. | Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Language | qf the | north Pacific coast. | [Picture.] | Victoria, B. C.: | Published by T. N. Hibben &Co. | Government street. [1883.] Cover title, title verso copyright notice (1877) and uame of printer 11. text pp. 5-35,8°. Part I. .Chinook-English, pp. 5-24—Part II. English-Chinook, pp. 24-34. — Lord's prayer in Jargon with English interlinear translation, p. 35. Copies seen: Pilling. Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Language | of the | north Pacific coast. | Victoria, B. C. | T. N. Hibben & co., Publishers, | Government Street. | 1887. Cover title: New Edition. | Dictionary [ of the | Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Language | of the | north Pacific coast. | [Picture.] | Victoria, B. C.: | Published by T. N. Hibben & Co. | Government street. [1887.] Cover title verso advertisement, title verso copyright notice (1887) and name of printer 11. text pp. 3-33,8°. Part I. Chinook-English, alphabetically arranged, pp. 3-21.—Part U. English-Chinook, alphabetically arranged, pp. 22-32. — Lord's prayer in Jargon with interlinear English translation, p. 33. Copies-seen: Ford. Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Language | of the | north Pacific coast. | Victoria, B. C. | B. C. stationery co., Publishers, | Government Street, 11887. Cover title: Dictionary | of the j Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Language | of the | north Pacific coast. | New edition. | B. C. stationery Co., Publishers, | Government Street, | Victoria, B. C. | 1887. Cover title, title verso copyrightnotice (1877, by T. N. Hibben) and name of printer 1 1. text pp. 3-33,8°. Part I. Chinook-English, alphabetically arranged, pp. 3-21.—Part II. English-Chinook, double columns, alphabetically arranged, pp. Dictionary — Continued. 22-32.—Lord's prayer in Jargon, with inter - linear English translation, p. 33. Copies seen: Pilling. Dictionary | of tho | Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Language, | of the j \ north Pacific coast. | [Vignette.] | Victoria, B. C. | T. N. Hibben [&] co., Publishers. | Government Street, || 1889. Cover tide: New Edition. | Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Language | of the | north Pacific coast. | [Picture.] | Victoria,B. C. \ Published by T. N. Hibben. & co. | Government street. [1889.] Cover title, title verso copyright (1877) and J name of printer 11. text pp. 3-32,8°. Part I. Chinook-English, alphabetically] arranged, pp. 3-21.—Part II. English-Chinook, alphabetically arranged, double columns, pp. 21-32.—Lord's prayer in Jargon with interlinear English translation, p. 32. Copies seen: Pilling, Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon | or | Indian trade language | now in general use on | the north-west coast. | Adapted for general business. | Olympia, W. T. | T. G. Lowe & co., : publishers and stationers. | 1873. | Printed at the Courier job rooms, Olympia, W. T. Title verso blank 11. text pp. 1-32,12°. Part I. Chinook-English, pp. 1-20.—Part II. English-Chinook, pp. 21-32. Copies seen: Bancroft. Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. (1868-1879.) See Blanchet (F. N.) Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. (1891.) See Coones (S. F.) Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. (1882-1887.) See Gill (J. K.) Dictionary of the Chinook . . . trade language. SeeProbsch (T. W.) Dictionary: Chinook See Boas (F.) Chinook Gibbs (G.) " Jargon (3d ed. 1856) Blanchet (F. N.) I Jargon (3d ed. 1862?) Blanchet (F.N.) " Jargon (4th ed. 1868) Blanchet.(F.N.) " Jargon (6th ed. 1873?) Blanchet (F.N.) " Jargon (6th ed. 1878) Blanchet (F. N.) I Jargon (7th ed. 1879) Blanchet (F. N.) I Jargon (Mss. 1891) Bulmer (T.S.) I Jargon (1891) Coones (S.F.) | Jargon (1871) Demers (M.) et al. " Jargon (1862) Dictionary. " Jargon (1865) Dictionary. •• Jargon (1871?) Dictionary. I Jargon (1873) Dictionary. " Jargon (1877?) Dictionary. CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 23 Dictionary— Continued. Chinook—Continued. Jargon (1883) Dictionary. Jargon (1887) Dictionary. Jargon (1887) Dictionary. Jargon (1889) Dictionary. Jargon (1886) Durieu (P.) Jargon (1892) Durieu (P.) Jargon (Mss. 1893) Eells (M.) Jargon (Mss. 1884) Everette (W. E.) Jargon (Wash., 1863) Gibbs (G.> Jargon (N. Y., 1863,8°) Gibbs (G.) Jargon (N. Y., 1863,4°) Gibbs (G.) Jargon (9th ed. 1882) Gill (J. K.) Jargon (10th ed.1884) Gill (J. K.) Jargon (11th ed.1887) Gill (J. K.) Jargon (12th ed. 1889) Gill (J. K.) Jargon (13th ed. 1891) Gill (J. K.) Jargon (1880) Good (J. B.) Jargon (1858) Guide. Jargon (1890) Hale (H.) Jargon (1872) Langvein (H. L.) Jargon (1886) LeJeune(J.M.R-) Jargon (1892) LeJeune(J.M.R.) Jargon (1853) Lionnet (—) Jargon (1888) Probsch (T. W.) Jargon (Mss. 1893) St. Onge (L. N.) Jargon (1865) Stuart (G.) Jargon (1889) Tate (C. M.) Jargon (1860) Vocabulary. Domenech (Abbe' Emanuel Henri Dieu- donn<s). Seven years' residence | in the great | deserts of North America | by the | abb^Em. Domenech | Apostolical Missionary : Canon of Montpellier: Member of the Pontifical Academy Tiberina, | and of the Geographical and Ethnographical Societies of France, &c. | Illustrated with fifty-eight woodcuts»by A. Joliet, three | plates of ancient Indian music, and a map showing the actual situation of | the Indian tribes and the country described by the author. | In Two Volumes | Vol. I[-II]. | London | Longman,Green, Longman, and Roberts | 1860 | The right of translation is reserved. 2 vols.: half-title verso names of printers 11. title verso blank 11. dedication pp. v-vi, preface pp. vii-xiii, contents pp. xv-xxi, list of illustrations pp. xxiii-xxiv, text pp. 1-445; half-title verso names of printers 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-xii, text pp. 1-465, colophon p. [466], map, plates, 8°. List of Indian tribes of North America, vol. 1, pp. 440-445.—Vocabularies,etc. vol. 2, pp. 164- 189, contain 84 words of the Chinook. Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenajum, British Museum, Congress, Watkinson. At the Field sale a copy,no.550, brought $2.37, and at the PinarF sale, no. 328,6 fr. Clarke & co. 1886, no. 5415, price a copy $5. Domenech (E. H. D.) — Continued. EmanuelHenriDieudonne Domenech,French author, was born in Lyons, France, November 4, 1825; died in France in June, 1886. He became a priest in the Roman Catholic church, and was sent as a missionary to Texas and Mexico. During Maximilian's residence in America, Domenech acted as private chaplain to the emperor, and he was also almoner to the French army during its occupation of Mexico. On his return to France he was made honorary canon of Montpellier. His " Manuscrit pictographique ameri- cain, pr6c6d6 d'ime notice sur l'id6ographie des Peaux Rouges" (1860) was published by the French government, with a facsimile of a manuscript in the library of the Paris arsenal, relating, as he claimed, to the Americanlndians; but the German orientalist, Julius Petzholdt, declared that it consisted only of scribbling and incoherent illustrations of a local German dialect. Domenech maintained the authenticity of the manuscript in a pamphlet entitled "La v6rit6 sur le livre des sauvages " (1861), which drew forth a reply from Petzholdt, translated into French under the title of "Le livre des sauvages au point de vue de la civilisation francaise" (Brussels, 1861). During the latter part of his life he produced several works pertaining to religion and ancient history.—Apple- ton's Cyclop, of Am. JBiog. Douglass (Sir James). Private papers | of Sir James Douglass. | Second series. Manuscript, pp. 1-36, folio; in the Bancroft Library, San Francisco, Cal. Contains lists of native tribes from Puget Sound northward to Cross Sound, Alaska, with traders' and native tribal names, grouped according to languages, pp. 7-33. Between pp. 33 and 34 are 14 blank pages. This manuscript was copied from the original papers in Sir James's possession; in Indian names the copyist has universally substituted an initial i£ for the initial K. Drake (Samuel Gardner). The | Aboriginal races | of | North America; | comprising | biographical sketches of eminent individuals, | and | an historical account of the different tribes, | from | the first discovery of the continent | to | the present period | with a dissertation on their | Origin, Antiquities, Manners and Customs, [ illustrative narratives and anecdotes, | and a | copious analytical index |by Samuel G.Drake. Fifteenth edition, | revised, with valuable additions. | by Prof. H. L.Williams. | [Quotation, six lines.] | New York. | Hurst & company, publishers. | 122 Nassau Street. [1882.] Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. 3-4, contents pp. 5-8, Indian tribes and nations pp. 24 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE fc Drake (S. G.) —Continued. 9-16, half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 19-767, index pp. 768-787,8°.' Gatschet (A. S.), Indian languages of the Pacific States, pp. 748-763. Copies seen: Astor, Congress, Wisconsin Historical Society. Clarke & co. 1886, no. 6377, price a copy $3. Duflot de Mofras (Eugene). Exploration | du territoire | de l'Oregon, | des Cali- fornies | et de la mer Vermeille, | 6x6- cutee pendant les anne"es 1840, 1841 et 1842, | par | M. Duflot de Mofras, | Attache* a la legation de France a Mexico; | ouvragepublie'parordreduroi, | sous les auspices de M. le marechal Soult, due de Dalmatie, | President du Conseil, | et de M. le ministre des affaires (stranger es. | Tome premier [-second]. | Paris, | Artbus Bertrand, 6diteur, [ libraire de la Society de gebgraphie, | Rue Hautefeuille, n° 23. | 1844. 2vols.: frontispiece 11. half-titleversonames of printers 11. title verso blank 11. dedication verso blank 1 1. avant-propos pp. vii-xii, aver- tissenient verso note 1 1. nota verso blank 11. text pp. 1-518, table des chapitres pp. 519-521, table des cartes pp. 523-524; half-title verso names of printers 11. title verso blank 11. text pp. 1-500, table des chapitres pp. 501-504, table descartespp. 505-506, tablealphabetique etana- lytique des matures pp. 507-514,8°, atlas folio. Chapitre xiii, Philologie, diversites de lan- gues, etc. (vol. 2, pp. 387-484), includes the Lord's prayer in langue Tchinouk du Rio Colombia, p. 390; numerals 1-10 of the Tchinooks, p. 401. Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athenaeum, British Museum, Congress, Geological Survey. Dufosse (E.) Americana | Catalogue de livres | relatifs a PAmerique | Europe, Asie, Afrique | et Oceanic | [&c. thirty- four lines] | Librairie ancienne et moderne de E. Dufosse' | 27, rue Guenegaud, 27 | pres le Pont-neuf | Paris [1887] Cover title as above, no inside title, table des divisions 11. text pp. 175-422,8°. Contains, passim, titles of a few works relating to the Chinookan languages. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. This series of catalogues was begun in 1876. Dunbar: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of Mr. John B. Dunbar, Bloomfield, N. J., which is now dispersed. Duncan (David). American races:' Compiled and abstracted by Professor Duncan, M. A. Duncan (D.) —Continued. Forms Part 6 of Spencer (H.), Descriptive sociology, London, 1878, folio. (Congress.) Under the heading " Language," pp. 40-42, there are given comments and extracts from various authors upon native tribes, including examples of the Chinook, p. 42. Some copies have the imprint: New York, D. Appleton & co. [n. d.] (Powell.) Dunn (John). History | of | the Oregon territory | and British North-American | fur trade; | with | an account | of the habits and customs of the principal native | tribes on the northern continent. | By John Dunn, | late of the Hudson's bay company; | eight years a resident in the | country. | London: | Edwards and Hughes, Aye Maria lane. | 1844. Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. iii-vi, contents pp. vii-viii, text pp. 1-359, map, 8°. A vocabulary (32 words and 9 phrases) of the language of the Chinook tribe, p. 359. Copies seen.- British Museum, Congress. There is an edition of this work: Philadelphia, Zeiber & co , 1845, which does not contain the vocabulary. (Boston Athenseum, British Museum. Harvard.) Reprinted, omitting the linguistics, in Smith's Weekly Volume, vol. 1, pp. 382-416, Philadelphia, 1845,4°. (Mallet.) History | of | the Oregon territory | and British North-American | fur trade; | with | an account | of the habits and customs of the principal native | tribes on the northern continent. | By John Dunn, | late of the Hudson bay company, | eight years a resident in the country. | Second edition. | London: | EdwardsandHughes,Ave- Maria lane. | 1846. Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. iii-vi, contents pp. vii-viii. text pp. 1-359, map, 8°. Linguistic contents as under title next above, p. 359. Copies seen: Astor. [Durieu (Bishop Paul).] Bible history | containing the most | remarkable events | of the | old and new testament. | To which is added a compendium of | church history. | For the use of the Catholic schools | in the United States. | By | right rev. Richard Gil- mour, D. D., | Bishop of Cleveland. [Translated into the Chinook Jargon by right rev. Paul Durieu, Bishop of British Columbia.] | [Vignette.] | CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES 25 Durieu (P.) — Continued. New-York, Cincinnati, and Chicago: | Benziger brothers, | printers to the holy apostolic see. [n. d.] [Kamloops, B.C.: 1893.] Frontispiece verso 1.1 recto blank, title verso letter from Pope Leo XIII and copyright notice j (1869)1 1. "approbations to Bishop Giimour's bible history" 3 11. preface pp. v-vi, text in English, pp. 7-56-K hi Chinook Jargon, stenographic characters, pp. 1-60+, 12°. In course of publication, and will contain 330 pages in | English and about 400 in Jargon. This work is an outcome- of the enterprise I of Father Le Jeune, of Kainloops, British Columbia, who has transcribed Bishop Durieu's Jargon translation of the bible history into the characters adopted by him for teaching his Indian charges to read and write; a description I of which will be found in this bibliography under- his name. His notes have been reproduced by him, with the aid of the mimeograph, I on sheets the size of those in the edition of the bible history in English, with which they have been interleaved. When finished it will be issued in an edition of 200, that number of copies of the edition in English having been I furnished by Father St. Onge, of Troy, N. T. Copies seen: Pilling. I have in my library a copy of each of two editions of a "Chinook Yocabulary," with imprints of 1886 and 1892, on the respective title pages of which appears the name of Bishop Durieu. These I had placed under his name, I Durieu (P.) — Continued. but in a letter to me, dated November 16,1892, the bishop modestly disclaims their authorship, which he attributes to Father J. M. R. Le Jeune, under whose name with accompanying explanations, they will be found In this bibliography. See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) The Rev. A. G-. Morice, of Stuart's Lake Mission, British Columbia, a famous Athapascan scholar, has kindly furnished me the following brief account of this writer: " Bishop Paul Durieu was born at St. Pal-de- M oi is, in the diocese of Puy, France, December 3,1830. After his course in classics he entered the novitiate of the Oblates at Notre Dame de l'Ozierin 1847 and made his religious profession in 1849. He was ordained priest at Marseilles March 11,1854, and was sent to tho missions of Oregon, where he occupied, successively, several posts. At the breaking out of the rebellion among the Yakama Indians he had to leave for the Jesuit mission at Spokane. He was afterwards sent to Victoria and then to Okanagan by his superiors. Thence he was sent as superior of the Fort Rupert Mission, and when, on June 2, 1875, lie was appointed coadjutor bishop of British Columbia, he was superior of St. Charles House at New "Westminster. On June 3,1890, he succeeded Bishop L. Y.D'Her- bainez as vicar apostolic of British Columbia. " Ho understands but does not speak several Salishan dialects, and he is especially noted for his unqualified success among the Indians." E. Eames: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of Mr. "Wilberforce Eames, New York City. Eells: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been loaned to me for collation and description by Rev. Myron Eells, Union City, Mason County, "Washington. Eells (Iter. Myron). How languages grow. In the Advance, March 25 and July 8,1875, Chicago, 1875, folio. (*) Relates wholly to the Chinook Jargon. Title and note furnished by Mr. Eells. Art. IV. The Twana Indians of the Skokomish reservation. By Rev. M. Eells, Missionary among these Indians. In Hayden (F. V.i, Bulletin, vol. 3, pp. 57-114, "Washington, 1877,8°. (Pilling.) Eour songs in Chinook, with English translations, pp. 91-92, Issued separately with cover title as follows: Author's- oilitinn. | Department of the interior. | United States geological Eells (M.) — Continued, and geographical survey. | F. V. Hayden, U. S. Geologist-in-Charge. | The | Twana Indians | of the | Skokomish reservation in Washington territory. | By | rev. M. Eells, | missionary among these Indians. | Extracted from the hnlletin of the survey, Vol. Ill, No. 1. | Washington, April 9,1877. Cover title as above, no inside title, text pp. 57-114, 8°. Linguistic contents as under title nextabove. Copies seen: Brinton, Eames, National Museum, Pilling. Hymns | in the | Chinook Jargon Language | compiled hy | rev. M. Eels [sic], | Missionary of the American Missionary Association. | [Vignette.] | Portland, Oregon: | publishing house of Geo. H. Himes. | 1878. Cover title as above, title as above verso copyright notice (1878) 1 1. note p. 3, text pp. 4- 30, sq. 16°. Hymns (alternate pages Jargon, with English headings, and English translation), pp. 4- 26- BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Eells (M.)—Continued. 27—Lord's prayer, with interlinear English translation, pp. 28-29 Blessing before meals, with interlinear English translation, p. 30. . Copies seen: Dunbar, Eames, Georgetown, Pilling, Wellesley. Hymns | in the | Chinook-f Jargon-f- Language | compiled by | rev. M. Eells | Missionary of the American Missionary Association. | Second edition. | Revised and Enlarged. | Portland, Oregon: [ David Steel, successor to Himes the printer, | 169-171 Second Street, | 1889. Covertitle as above verso note, title as above verso copyright notice (1878 and 1889) 1 1. note p. 3, text pp. 4-40, sq. 160. Hymns (alternate pages Jargon, with English headings and English translation), pp. 4- 31—Hymn in the Twana or Skokomish language, p. 32; English translation, p. 33.—Hymn in the Clallam language, p. 34; English translation, p. 35.—JTynin in the Nisqually language, p. 36; English translation, p. 37.—Medley in four languages (Jargon, Skokomish. Clallam, ami English), p.36; English translation, p. 37.— Lord's prayer in Jargon, with interlinear English translation, pp. 38-39.—Blessing before meals, in Jargon, with interlinear English translation, p. 40. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. The Twana language of Washington territory. By rev. M. Eells. In American Antiquarian, vol. 3, pp. 296-303. Chicago, 1880-1881,8°. (Bureau of Ethnology.) A grammatic treatise upon several Indian languages of Washington Territory, among them the Chinook Jargon, p. 303. The Chinook Jargon. In the Seattle Weekly Post-Intelligencer, vol. 1, no. 52, p. 4, column 8, Seattle, Washington Ty., September 29,1882. (Pilling.) Explains the origin of "that miserable Chinook," defends it as a useful intertribal language and for intercourse between the Indians and white men, gives the derivation of several words of the language and some grammatic notes. History of | Indian missions | on the Pacific coast. | Oregon, Washington and Idaho. | By | rev. Myron Eells,. | Missionary of the American Missionary Association. | With | an introduction | by | rev. G. H. Atkinson, D.D. | Philadelphia: | the American Sunday- school union, | 1122 Chestnut Street. | 10 Bible house, New York. [1882.] Frontispiece, title verso copyright (1882) 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-vi, introduction by G. H. Atkinson pp. vii-xi, preface (dated October, 1882) pp. xiii-xvi, text pp. 17-270,12°. Eells (M.)—Continued. Chapter v, Literature, science, eduoation morals, and religion (pp. 202-226), contains a short list of books, papers, and manuscripts relating to the Indians of the northwest coast, among them the Chinook and Chinook Jargon, pp.203-207,209-211. Copies seen: Congress, Pilling. Ten years | of | missionary work | among the Indians | at | Skokomish, Washington territory. | 1874-1884. | By Rev. M. Eells, | Missionary of the American Missionary Association. | Boston: | Congregational Sunday- School Publishing Society, | Congregational house, | Corner Beacon and Somerset Streets. [1886.] Half-title (Ten years at Skokomish) verso blank 11. frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright (1886) and names of printers 1 1. preface 11. dedication verso note 1 1. contents pp. vii-x, introduction pp. 11-13, text pp. 15-271,12°. Hymn (three verses) in Chinook Jargon, with English translation, pp. 248-249.—Specimen lines of a Jargon hymn, pp. 253-254. Copies seen: Congress, Pilling. Indians of Puget Sound. (Sixth' paper.) Measuring and valuing. In American Antiquarian, vol. 10, p. 174-178, Chicago, 1888,8°. (Bureau of Ethnology.) Numerals, and remarks concerning the numeral system of quite a number of the languages of Washington Territory, among them the Chinook. The preceding articles of the series, all of which appeared in the American Antiquarian, contain no linguistic material. It was the intention of tbe editor of the Antiquarian, when the series should be finished, to issue them in book form. So far as they were printed in the magazine they were repaged and perhaps a number of signatures struck off. The sixth paper, for instance, titled above, I have in my possession, paged 44-48. The Twana, Chemakum, and Klallam Indians of Washington Territory. By Rev. Myron Eells. In Smithsonian Institution, Annual Rept. of the Board of Regents for 1887, part i, pp. 605- 681, Washington, 1889,8°. (Pilling.) Numerals 1-10 of a-number of Indian languages of Washington Territory, among them the Chinook Jargon, p. 644.—Remarks on the same, p. 645.—Three words of the Chinook Jargon not found in Gibbs's dictionary, p. 652.— Word for God in Twana, Nisqually, Klallam, and Chinook, p. 679. "The Chinook Jargon has been ably compiled by Hon.G. Gibbs. I know of but three words in this locality of Indian origin which are not in his dictionary. . . Out of about 800 words and phrases which answer for words w CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 27 Eells (M.)—Continued. given by him, only about 470 are used here' which shows how the same language will vary in different localities." This article was issued separately, also, without change. And again as follows: The Twana, Chemakum, and Klallam Indians of Washington territory. By Rev. Myron Eells. In Smithsonian Institution, Misc. Papers relating to anthropology, from tbe Smithsonian report for 1886-'87, pp. 605-681, Washington, 1889,8°. (Eames, Pilling.) Linguistic contents as under title next above. Aboriginal geographic names in the state of Washington. By Myron Eells. In American Anthropologist, vol. 5, pp. 27- 35, Washington. 1892,8°. (Pilling.) Arranged alphabetically and derivations given. The languages represented are: Chinook, Chinook Jargon, Nez Perce, Chehalis, Clallam, Twana, Calispel, Cay use, Puyallup, and Spokane. [Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon.] (*) Under date of January 9, 1893, Mr. Eells writes me, concerning this work, as follows: 1' Ihave been at work for the last ten months, as I have had spare time, on a Chinook Jargon- English and English-Chinook Jargon Dictionary, with introduction, remarks about the language, and grammar. I am gathering all the words I can find, whether obsolete or not, from about fifteen Chinook dictionaries which have been issued since 1838 with the various spellings', marking, as far as I can, all those now in use; also introducing all which have been adopted into the language of late years from the English and all phrases which can be used as words. I have gone through with the English- Chinook part and have nearly three thousand words; have gone through with the Chinook- English part except £ and T and have about two thousand; I hope to finish it this winter, though it is much more of a task than I supposed it would be when I began. I hardly expect it will ever be published, but will keep it in manuscript, having done it largely to preserve the language in its present transitional form, which is quite different from what it was thirty or forty years ago. "I hardly know whether it is worth while for you to mention this, as it is in such an unfinished state; still I have even now put far more work on it than I have on all my other Chinook Jargon writings." [Words, phrases and sentences in the Chinook Jargon.] (*) Manuscript in possession of its author. Recorded in a copy of Powell's Introduction to the study of Indian languages, second edition, pp. 77-103,105,109-111,113-125, 127,129,132-188, 189-227. On p. 228 is a translation of John iii, 16. Eells (M.) — Continued. [Sermons in the Chinook Jar- gon.] (•) Manuscript, 26 pages, 8°, in possession of its author. "About 16 years ago, in 1875, when I was learning to talk the language, I wrote four sermons in the Chinook Jargon which I still have. Since that time I have preached a great deal'in the language, but do it so easily that I simply make a few headings in English and talk extempore. On looking over these sermons I find that were I to use them again I should need to revise them and to change many expressions so as to make them clearer." Titles and notes of these three manuscripts furnished me by Mr. Eells. See Bulmer (T.S.) Rev. Myron Eells was born at Walker's Prairie, "Washington Territory, October 7,1843; he is the son of Rev. Cushing Eells, D. D., and Mrs. M. F. Eells, who went to Oregon in 1838 as missionaries to the Spokane Indians. He left "Walker's Prairie in 1848 on account of the ■ "Whitman massacre at Wallawalla and Cayuse war, and went to Salem, Oregon, where he began to go to school. In 1849 he removed to Eorest Grove,Oregon; inl851 to Hillsboro,Oregon, and in 1857 again to Eorest Grove, at which places he continued his school life. In 1862 he removed to Wallawalla, spending the time in farming and the wood business until 1868, except the falls, winters, and springs of 1863-'64,1864-'65, and 1865-'66, when he was at Forest Grove» in college, graduating from Pacific University in 1866, in the second class which ever graduated from that institution. In 1868 he went to Hartford, Conn., to study for the ministry, entering the Hartford Theological Seminary that year, graduating from it in 1871, and being ordained at Hartford, June 15,1871, as a Con- gregatioral minister. He went to Boise City in October, 1871, under the American Home Missionary Society, organized the Firlt Congregational church of that place in 1872, and was pastor of it until he left in 1874. Mr. Eells was also superintendent of its Sunday school from 1872 to 1874 and president of the Idaho Bible Society from 1872 to 1874. He went to Skokomish, Washington, in June, 1874, and has worked as missionary of the American Missionary Association ever since among the Skokomish or Twana, and Clallam Indians; pastor of Congregational church at Skokomish Reservation since 1876, and superintendent of Sunday school at Skokomish since 1882. He organized a Congregational church among the Clallams in 1882, of which he has since been pastor, and another among the whites at Sea- beck in 1880, of which he was pastor until 1886. In 1887 he was chosen trustee of the Pacific University, Oregon j in 1885 was elected assistant secretary and in 1889 secretary of its board of trustees. He delivered the address before the Gamma Sigma society of that institution in 28 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE fit it Eells (M.) — Continued. 1876, before the alumni in 1890, and preached the baccalaureate sermon in 1886. In 1888 he was chosen trustee of Whitman College, Washington, delivered the commencement address there in 1888, and received the degree of D.D. from that institution in 1890. In 1888 he was elected its financial secretary, and in 1891 was asked to become president of the institution, but declined both. He was elected an associate member of the "Victoria Institute of London in 1881, and a corresponding member of the Anthropological Society at Washington in 1885, to both of which societies he has furnished papers which have been published by them. He was also elected vice-president of the Whitman Historical Society at Wallawalla in 1889. From 1874 to 1886 he was clerk of the Congregational Association of Oregon and "Washington. Mr. Eells at present (1893) holds the position of superintendent of the department of ethnology for the State of Washington at the World's Columbian Exposition. Emmons (George Falconer). Replies to inquiries respecting the Indian tribes of Oregon and California. By George Falconer Emmons, U. S. N. In Schoolcraft (H. R.), Indian Tribes, vol. 3. pp. 200-225, Philadelphia, 1853,4°. Vocabulary of the Clatsop dialect (about 40 words), pp. 223-224. " Many words in this language, I piesume, are common to the Chinook language, and. perhaps to the Chickeelis and Kilamukes, who mix with and appear to understand each other." Everette (Dr. Willis Eugene). Comparative literal translation of the " Lord's Prayer" in the T(f;inuk or Chinook Jargon with English. (*) Manuscript; recorded " from personal knowledge of the language. "Written at Chil- cat, Alaska, 1884. Corrected word by word by Sitka and Chilcat Indians." Comparative literal translation of the Ten Commandments in the T0inuk or Chinook Jargon with English. (*) Manuscript; recorded "from personal knowledge of the language. "Written at Pyramid Harbor, Alaska, in May, 1884, and corrected word by word by repeating to Chilcat, Sitka, and British Columbia Indians until they were thoroughly satisfied with each word and its meaning, as well as a full understanding of each sentence." A Dictionary of the Language of the "Klinkit" (Klmgi't) or Chilcat Indians of Alaska, together with that of the T^inuk, or Chinook Trade Jargon used on the North American Pacific Coast compared with English. (*) Everette (W. E.) — Continued. Manuscript; 1,000 words, alphabetically arranged. Recorded '' from personal knowledge of the language, and corrected word by word by the Indian trader, Mr. Dickinson, and Chilcat and Sitka Indians, during April, 1884, at Pyramid Harbor, Alaska." Titles and notes concerning the above manuscripts furnished by the author. Hymn in the Chinook Jargon as sung by the Indians of Lake Chelan, Washington territory, U. S. A. Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. The hymn, which is written in black ink, is accompanied by an English interlinear translation in red. The Lord's Prayer | in | Chinook Jargon | as spoken by the Indian Tribes that live on the Pacific coast of Western Oregon, U. S. A. Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. The prayer in Jar gon is written in black, with an English interlinear translation in red. ' The two last mentioned manuscripts were transmitted to the Bureau of Ethnology from the Yakama Indian Agency, August 15,1883. « From notes kindly furnished me by the subject of this sketch, I have compiled the follow- " ing: Dr. "Willis Eugene Everette was born in Brooklyn, New York, in 1855. He was placed under the care of tutors at an early age, and when his parents died, at the close of tbe war, he began to plan for his own education and future life work. After eight years of study under private tutors and in various schools of learning, he resolved to attempt to investigate the origin of the aboriginal races of North America. He went direct into the field among the Indians of the western shores of Hudson Bay, where he wintered. Here he began studying the languages, manners, and customs of the Cree, Athabasca, and Chippewa. Thence he journeyed amongst theSaulteux, Blood, Piegan, and Blackfeet; the Sioux, Gros-Ventres, Man- dan, Assiniboine, and Crow; the Paiute and Klamath people; the Rogue River, Alzea, and Siletz Indians; the Umatilla and Nez Perce people; the Klikitat and Yakima tribes; the Indians of Puget Sound; thence up along the British Columbia coast to Chilcat, Alaska, where the Tlinkit, Sheetkah, and other Alaskan races were found; thence across the main range of Alaska into the headwaters of the Yukon River, and down the Yukon throughout the interior of Alaska to the Arctic sea coast, among the Kutcha-Kutchin, Kvichpatshi, and Yukoniyut people, of the valley of the Yukon River and seacoast of Norton Sound; and, finally, down to the Aleutian Archipelago, . among the Aleuts of Unalaska, thus coin- pleting a chain of investigation from the CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 29 Everette (W. E.) — Continued. northern extremities of the United States and along the Pacific coast to the northwestern part of North America. From time to time he returned to civilization for the purpose of making studies in geology, medicine, chemistry, law, and mineralogy. He is now writing up his numerous explorations as fast as his mining and law practice will permit. He has several hundred manuscripts, personally collected, of the languages, Everette (W. E.) — Continued. manners, customs, and traditions of the North American aborigines, and is in hopes that some day he will have leisure enough to reduce them into a set of about ten quarto volumes. Although mining geolpgy and mining law is h is profession, his actual life work has been the study of the anthropology of our North American aborigines, and he devotes all his spare time to the latter. His present location is Tacoma, Washington. F. Featherman (A.) Social history | of the | races of mankind. | First division: | Nigritians[-Third division: | Aoneo- Maranonians]. | By | A. Featherman. | [Two lines quotation.] | London :|Triibner&co.,LudgateHill. 11885 [-1889]. | (All rights reserved.) 3 vols. 8°. A general discussion of a number of North Ameri can families of speech occurs in volume 3, among them $be Chinook, which occupies pp. 369-378, and which includes a brief account of their language on p. 373. Copies seen: Congress. Field (Thomas Warren). An essay | towards an | Indian bibliography. | Being a | catalogue of books, | relating to the | history, antiquities, languages, customs, religion, | wars, literature, and origin of the | American Indians, | in the library of | Thomas W. Field. | With bibliographical and historical notes, and | synopses cf the contents of some of | the works least known. | New York: ] Scribner, Armstrong, and co. | 1873. Title verso names of printers 11. preface pp. iii-iv, text pp. 1-430,8°. Titles and descriptions of worksin orrelating to the Chinookan languages passim. Copies seen : Congress, Eames, Pilling. A t the Field sale.no. 688, acopy brought$4.25; at the Menzies sale, no. 718, a " half-crushed, red levant morocco, gilt top, uncut copy," brought $5.50. Priced by Leclerc, 1878,18 fr. j by Quaritch, no. 11996,15s.; at the Pinart sale, no. 368, it brought 17 fr.; at the Murphy sale, no. 949, $4.50. Priced by Quaritch, no. 30224, \l. Catalogue | of the | library | belonging to | Mr. Thomas W. Field. | To be sold at auction, | by | Bangs, Merwin & co., | May 24th, 1875, | and following days. | New York. | 1875. Cover title 22 lines, title as above verso blank 1 1. notice etc pp. iii-viti, text pp. 1-376, list of Field i T. W.) — Continued. prices pp. 377-393, supplement pp. 1-59,8°. Compiled by Mr. Joseph Sabin, mainly irom Mr. Field's Essay, title of which is given above. Contains titles of a number of works in and relating to the Chinookan languages. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Eames. At the Squier sale, no. 1178, an uncut copy brought $1.25. Ford: This word following a title or inclosed within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been aedhby the compiler, belonging to the library of Mr. Paul L. Ford, Brooklyn, N. Y. Franchere (Gabriel). Relation | d'un | voyage | a la c6te du | nord-ouest | de | l'Amerique Septentrionale, | dans les annees | 1810, 11, 12, 13, et 14. | Par G. Franchere, fils. j Montreal: | de l'imprimerie de C. B. Pasteur. | 1820. Half-title (Relation d'un voyage) verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. 5-6, avant propos pp. 7-10, text pp. 11-284,8°. Quelques mots (46) de la langueChinouque- ou Tchinouk, pp. 204-205.—Eleven phrases in the same, p. 205. Copies seen : Georgetown, Jacques Cartier School, Mallet. Narrative | of a | voyage | to | the northwest coast of America | in the years 1811,1812,1813, and 1814 | or the | first American settlement on the Pacific | By Gabriel Franchere | Translated and edited by J. V. Huntington | [Vignette] | Redfield | 110 and 112 Nassau street, New York | 1854. Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright and name of stereotyper 1 1. preface to the second edition pp. 3-7, preface [in English] to the French edition pp. 9-10, contents pp. 11-16, introduction pp. 17-22, text pp. 23-376,16°. A brief reference to the Chinook language, p. 262. The vocabulary and phrases are omitted in this edition. * » ■ 30 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE w I Franchere (G.) — Continued. Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, Georgetown, Mallet, Pilling, Trumbull. Gabriel Franohere was born on November 3, 1786, in Montreal, whero his father had established himself as a merchant. His early life appears to have been spent at sohool and behind his father's counter. In the spring of'1810 Franchere sought employment in the Pacific Fur Company, and on May 24 he signed articles of engagement with one of the company's partners. By this agreement he bound himself to the service of the company, as & clerk, for five years. In July he left home, with a number of his young compatriots, in canoes for New York. The Pacific Fur Company was equipping two expeditions for the Columbia country— one overland, from St. Lonis, and the other by sea, around Cape Horn, and. Franchere was assigned to the party going by sea. September, 1810, the ship Tonquin, Jonathan .Thorn, lieutenant U. S. Navy, master, set sail for tile Pacific coast. On April 12 the party were landed on the south side of tbe Columbia-, ten miles from its mouth, and the company's principal port, called Astoria, was founded. Franchere exhibited a wonderful talent for acquiring the Indian languages of the country, and otherwise made himself so useful that he was retained at headquarters most of the time, although he made a number of excursions up the Columbia, the Cowlitz, and the Willamette. Afterthedisbandmentof the PacifioFur Company he entered temporarily into the service of the Northwest Company; but, although bril- Franchere (G.) — Continued. liant offers were made to him, as soon as opportunity offered he determined to return to Montreal by the Canadian overland route up the Columbia, across the Rocky Mountains through the Athabasca Pass, down the Athabasca, across the marshes, down the Saskatchewan, across Lake Winnipeg, up Winnipeg and Rainy rivers, down the Kaministiqua, across Lakes Superior and Huron, up the French River, across tbe height of lands at Lake Nipis- sing, down the Mattawan, and finally down the Ottawa to the St. Lawrence, a distance of five thousand miles, traveled in canoes and on foot. He appeared under the paternal roof on the evoning of September 1, 1814, greatly to the surprise of his family, who had received no intelligence of him since he had left New York, four years previously, and who mourned him as dead, since they imagined he had perished in the ill-fated Tonquin, off the coast of New Caledonia. Franohere removed to Sault Ste. Marie with his young family in 1834 and engaged in the fur trade. Later he became a partner in the noted commercial house of P. Choteau, Son & Co., of St. Louis, and later still he established himself in New York City as the senior partner in the firm of G. Franohere & Co. He died at the residence of his son-in-law, Hon. John S. Prince, mayor of St. Paul, Minn., at the age of seventy years, tho last survivor of the celebrated Astor expeditions.—Mallet, in Catholic Annual, 1887. Frost (J. H.) See Lee (D.) and Frost (J.H.) G. Gairdner (Dr. —). Notes on the Geography of the Columbia River. By the late Dr. Gairdner. In Royal Geog. Soc. Jour. vol. 11, pp. 250-257, London, 1841, 8°. (Congress.) Notes on the Indian tribes of the upper and lower Columbia, pp. 255-256, contains a list of the peoples of that locality, with their habitat, among them the divisions of the Chinook. Gallatin (Albert). A synopsis of the Indian tribes within the United States east of the Rocky Mountains and in the British and Russian possessions in North America. By the Hon. Albert Gallatin. In American Antiquarian Soc. Trans. (Archasologia Americana), vol. 2, pp. 1-422, Cambridge, 1836,8°. A vocabulary of 33 words, and the numerals 1-12, 20, in Chinook (mouth of the Columbia), p. 379. Gallatin (A.) — Continued. Hale's Indians of North-west America, and vocabularies of North America; with an introduction. By Albert Gallatin. In Amerioan Ethnological Soc. Trans, vol. 2, pp. xxiii-clxxxviii, 1-130, New York, 1848,8°. General account of the Tsinuk, or Chinooks, pp. 15-17. — The Tshinuk family (pp. 56-58) includes pronunciation, p. 56; personal pronouns of the Watlala, p. 56; possessive pronouns, p. 57; partial conjugation of the verb to be cold, p. 57; transitive inflections, p. 58; pluralization of nouns in the Waiwaikum, p. 58.—The." Jargon" or trade language of Oregon (pp. 62-70) includes a general account of the language, pp. 62-64; Jargon words (41) derived from the English, p. 64; derived from the French (33), p. 65; formed by onomatopoeia (12), p. 65; alphabetical English meaning of the words of the J argon (165), p.66; grammatic treatise, pp.66-70. "All the words thus brought together and combined in this singularly constructed speech CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 31 ] Gallatin (A.) — Continued. [Jargon] are about two hundred and fifty in number. Of these, 110, including the numerals, are from the Tshinuk, 17 from the IN ootkas, 38 from either the one or the other, but doubtful from wbioh; 33 from the French, and 41 from the English. These two last are subjoined, as well as the words formed by onomatopoeia; and an alphabetical English list of all the other words is added, whioh will show of what materials the scanty vocabulary consists.'' Vocabulary of the lower Chinook (179 words), pp. 89-95.—Vocabulary of the Wathda (60 words), p. 121. Table of generic Indian families of languages. In Schoolcraft (H.R.), Indian tribes, vol. 3, pp. 397-402, Philadelphia, 1853,4°. Includes the Tshinook, p. 402. Albert Gallatin was born in Geneva, Switzerland, January 29,1761, and died in Astoria, L. I., August 12,1849. He was descended from an ancientpatrician family of Geneva, whose name had long been honorably connected with the history of Switzerland. Young Albert had been baptized by the name of Abraham Alfonse Albert. In 1773 he was sent to a boarding school and a year later entered the University of Geneva, where he was graduated in 1779. He sailed from L'Orient late in May, 1780, and reached Boston on July 14. He entered Congress on December 7, 1795, and continued a member of that body until his appointment as Secretary of the Treasury in 1801, which office he held oontinously until 1813. His services were rewarded with the appointment of minister to France in February, 1815; he entered on the duties of this office in January, 1816. In 1826, at the solicitation of President Adams, he accepted the appointment of envoy extraordinary to Great Britain. On his return to the United States he settled in New York City, where, from 1831 to 1839, he was president of the National Bank of New York. In 1842 he was associated in the establishment of the American Ethnological Society, becoming its first president, and in 1843 he was elected to hold a similar office in the New York Historical Society, an honor which was annuallyconferred on him until his death.—Appleton's Cyclop, of Am. Siog. Gatschet: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of Mr. Albert S. Gatschet. Washington, T>. C. Gatschet (Albert Samuel). Indian languages of the Pacific states and territories. In Magazine of American Hist. vol. 1, pp. 145-171, New York, 1877, sm. 4°. (Puling.) Short account of the Chinook language and Sjr.its dialects, p. 167.—Same of the Chinook Jargon, p. 168. Issued separately with half-title as follows: Gatschet (A. S.) — Continued. Indian languages | of the | Pacific states and. territories | by | Albert S. Gatschet | Reprinted from March [1877] Number of The Magazine of American History [New York: 1877.] Half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 145-171, sm. 4°. Linguistic contents as under title next above. Copies seen: Astor, Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. Reprinted in the following works: Beach (W. W.), Indian Miscellany, pp. 416- 447, Albany, 1877,8°. Drake (S. G.), Aboriginal races of North America, pp. 748-763, New York, 1882,8°. A supplementary paper by the same author and with the same title, which appeared in the Magazine of American History, vol. 8, contains no Chinookan material. Vocabulary of the Clackama language. Manuscript, 7 leaves, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Grande RondeRoserve, Yamhill Co., Oregon, in December, 1877, from Frank Johnson, a Clackama Indian, and recorded on one of the Smithsonian forms (no. 170) of 211 words. About 150 words and phrases are given. Words, phrases, and sentences in the Clackama language. Manuscript; recorded in a copy of Introduction to the Study of Indian Languages, 1st edition. Material collected at Grande Ronde reservation, Yamhill County, Oregon, December, 1877. Vocabulary of the Wasco and Wac- canessisi dialects of the Chinuk family. Manuscript, 7 pp. folio. Taken at the Klamath Lake Agency, Oregon, in 1877. Albert Samuel Gatschet was born in St. Beat- enberg, in the Bernose Oberland, Switzerland, October 3,1832. His propedeutic education was acquired in the lyceums of Neuchatel (1843- 1845) and of Berne (1846-1852), after which he followed courses in the universities of Berne and Berlin (1852-1858). His studies had for their object the ancient world in all its phases of religion, history, language, and art, and thereby his attention was at an early day direoted to philologic researches. In 1865 he began the publication of a series of brief monographs on the local etymology of his country, entitled " Orts- etymologische Forschungen aus der Schweiz" (1865-'67). In 1867 he spent several months in London pursuing antiquarian studies in the BritishMuseum. In 1868 he settled in New York and became a contributor to various domestic and foreign periodicals, mainly on scientific subjects. Drifting into amore attentive study of the American Indians, he published several compositions upon their languages, the most j 32 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Gatschet (A. S.) — Continued. important of which is " Zwolf Sprachen aus dem Siidwesten Nordamerikas," Weimar, 1876. This led to his being appointed to the position of ethnologist in the United States Geological Survey, under Maj. John W. Powell, in March, 1877, when he removed to Washington, and first employed himself in-arranging the linguistic manuscripts of the Smithsonian Institution, now the property of the Bureau of Ethnology, which forms a part of the Smithsonian Institution. Mr. Gatschet has ever since been actively connected with that bureau. To increase its linguistic collections and to extend his own studies of the Indian languages, he has made extensive trips of linguistic and ethnologic exploration among the Indians of North America. After returning from a six months' sojourn among the Klamaths and Kalapuyas of Oregon, settled on both sides of the Cascade Range, he visited the Kataba in South Carolina and the Cha'hta and Shetimasha of Louisiana in 1881-82, the Kayowe, Comanche, Apache, Yattassee, Caddo, Naktche, Modoc, and other tribes in the Indian Territory, the Tonkawe and Lipans in'Texas, and the Atakapa Indians of Louisiana in 1884-'85. In 1886 he saw the Tlaskaltecs at Saltillo, Mexico, a remnant of the Nahua race, brought there about 1575 from Anahuac, and was tho first to discover the affinity of the Biloxi language with the Siouan family. He also committed to writing the Tunixka or Touica language of Louisiana, never before investigated and forming a linguistic family of itself- Excursions to other parts of thecountry brought to his knowledge other Indian languages : the Tuskarora, Canghnawaga, Penobscot, and Karankawa, Mr. Gatschet has compiled an extensive report embodying his researches among the Klamath Lake and Modoc Lndians of Oregon, which forms Vol. II of Contributions to North American Ethnology. Among the tribes and languages discussed by him in separate publications are the Timucua (Florida), Tonkawe (Texas), Yuma (California, Arizona, Mexico), Chumeto (California), Beothuk (Newfoundland), Creek, and Hitchiti (Alabama). His numerous papers are scattered through the publications of the various learned societies, the magazines, and government reports. General discussion: See Bancroft (H. H.) Beach (W. W.) Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Jargon Ghinook Jargon Berghaus (H.) Brinton (D. G.) Duncan (D.) Eells (M.) Featherman (A.) Gallatin (A.) Gatschet (A. S.) Hale (H.) Sproat (G. M.) Whymper (F.) Bancroft (H. H.) Beach (W. W.) General discussion — Chinook Jargon See Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Geographic names: Chinook •Continued. Clough (J. C.) Drake (S. G.) Eells (M.) Gatschet (A. S.) Haines (E. M.) Hale (H.) Nicoll (E. H.) Reade (J.) Sproat (G.M.) Swan (J. G.) AVestern. Wilson (D.) See Gibbs (G.) Geological Survey: These words following a title or within parentheses after a note indicate that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of the United States Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Georgetown: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of Georgetown University, Washington, D. C. Gibbs (Dr. George). Smithsonian miscellaneous collections. 11611A | dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | or | trade language of Oregon. | Prepared for the Smithsonian institution. | By | George Gibbs. | [Seal of the institution.] | Washington: | Smithsonian institution: | March, 1863. Title verso advertisement 1 1. contents p. Hi, preface pp. v-xi, bibliography pp. xiii-xiv, half- title (Part I. Chinook-English) verso note 1 1. text pp. 1-29, half-title (Part II. English- Chinook) p. 31, text pp. 33-44, 8°. General discussion of the language and its derivation, pp. v-viii. — Short comparative vocabulary (eighteen words and phrases) of English, Tlaoquatch and Nutka, and Columbian, p. ix.—Analogies between the Chinook and other languages (Haeltzuk, Belbella, Clatsop, Nutka, Cowlitz, Kwantlen, Selish, Chi- halis/Nisqually, Yakama and Klikatat), p. x Bibliography of the Chinook Jargon (sixteen entries), pp. xiii-xiv.—Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon: Chinook-English, pp. 1-29; English-Chinook, pp. 33-43.—The Lord's prayer in Jargon, with interlinear English translation, p. [44]. Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Dunbar, Eames, Pilling, Trumbull, Wellesley. 1' Some years ago the Smithsonian Institution printed a small vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon, furnished by Dr. B. R. Mitchell, of the U. S. Navy, and prepared, as I afterwards learned, by Mr. Lionnet, a Catholic priest, for his own use while studying the language at Chinook Point. It was submitted by the Institution, for revision and preparation for the press, to the late Professor W. W. Turner. CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 33 ^Gibbs (G.)—Continued. Although it received the critical examination of that distinguished philologist, and was of nse in direoting attention to the language, it was deficient in the number of words in use, contained many which did not properly belong to the Jargon, and did not give the sources from which the words were derived. "Mr. Hale had previously given a vocabulary and account of this Jargon in his' Ethnography of the United States Exploring Expedition,' which was noticed by Mr. Gallatin in the Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, vol. ii. He however fell into some errors in his derivation of the words, chiefly from ignoring the Chehalis element of the Jargon, and the number of words given by him amounted only to about two hundred and fifty. "A copy of Mr. Lionnet's vocabulary having been sent to me with a request to make such corrections as itmight require, I concluded not merely to collate the words contained in this and other printed and manuscript vocabularies, but to ascertain, so far as possible, the languages which had contributed to it, with the original Indian words. This had become the more important as its extended use by different tribes had led to ethnological errors in the classing together of essentially distinct families."—Preface. Issued also with title-page as follows; A | dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | or, | trade language of Oregon. | By George Gibbs. | New York: | Cramoisy press. | 1863. Half-title (Shea's Library of American Linguistics. XII.) verso blank 11. title verso blank 11. preface pp. v-xi, bibliography of the Chinook Jargon pp. xiii-xiv, half-title of part I verso note 1 1. Chinook-English dictionary pp. 1-29, half-title of part II verso blank 1 1. English- Chinook dictionary pp. 33-43, the Lord's prayer in Jargon p. [44], 8°. Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenseum, Congress, Dunbar, Harvard, Lenox, Smithsonian, Trumbull, Wellesley. Some copies (twenty-five, I believe) were issued in large quarto form with no change of title-page. (Pilling, Smithsonian.) See Hale (H.) Alphabetical vocabulary | of the | Chinook language. | By | George Gibbs. | [Small design, with motto in Irish and Latin.] 1 New York: | Cramoisy press. | 1863. Title verso blank 11. preface pp. iii-v, orthography p. vi, bibliography pp. vii-viii, text pp. 9-23,8°. Vocabulary (English-Chinook), pp. 9-20.— Local nomenclature, pp. 21-23. Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenseum, British Museum,Congress, Eames, Harvard,Lenox, Smithsonian, TrumbullTWellesley. CHIN 3 Gibbs (G.) — Continued. Some copies contain a loose half-title (Shea's | library of American linguistics. | VLH.) inserted afterwards. (Lenox.) There was a small edition (twenty-five copies, I believe) issued in large quarto form, with title slightly changed, as follows: ' Alphabetical vocabulary | of the | Chinook language. | By | George Gibbs. | Published under the auspices of the Smithsonian institution. | New York: | Cramoisy press. | 1863. Title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. iii-v, orthography p. vi, bibliography pp. vii-viii, text pp. 9-23,4°. Vocabulary alphabetically arranged by English words, double columns, pp. 9-20.— Local nomenclature, pp. 21-23. Copies seen: Eames, Lenox, Pilling, Smithsonian. Bibliography of the Chinook Jargon. In Gibbs (G.), Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon, pp. xiii-xiv, Washington, 1863,8°. Contains sixteen titular entries, chronologically arranged. Reprinted in the same work: New York, 1863, 8° and 4°, titled above. Bibliography [of the Chinook language] . In Gibbs (G.), Alphabetical vocabulary of the Chinooklanguage, pp. vii-viii, New York, 1863, 8° and 4°. Contains six titular entries only. Chinook Jargon Vocabulary. Compiled by Geo. Gibbs, Esq. Manuscript, 38 pages, 8°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded in a blank book; alphabetically arranged by Jargon words. Contains 481 entries. George Gibbs, the son of Col. George Gibbs, was born on thel7th of July, 1815, at Sunswick, Long Island, near the village of Halletts Cove, now known as Astoria. At seventeen he was taken to Europe, where he remained two years. On his return from Europe he commenced the reading of law, and in 1838 took his degree of bachelor of law at Harvard University. In 1848 Mr. Gibbs went overland from St. Louis to Oregon and established himself at Columbia. In 1854 he received the appointment of collector of the port of Astoria, which he held during Mr. Fillmore's administration. Later he removed from Oregon to Washington Territory, and settled upon a ranch a few miles from Fort Steilacoom. Here he had his headquarters for several years, devoting himself to the study of tho Indian languages and to the collection of vocabularies and traditions of the northwestern tribes. During a great part of the time he was attached to the United States Government Commission in laying the boundary, as the geologist or botanist of the expedition. He 34 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 1 *t! Gibbs (G.) — Continued. was also attached as geologist to the survey of a railroad route to the Pacific, under Major Stevens. In 1857 he was appointed to the northwest boundary survey under Mr. Archibald Campbell, as commissioner. In 1860 Mr. Gibbs returned to New York, and in 1861 was on duty in Washington in guarding the Capital. Later he resided in Washington, being mainly employed in the Hudson Bay Claims Commission, to which he was secretary. He was also engaged in the arrangement of a large mass of manuscript bearing upon the ethnology and philologyoftheAmericanlndians. His services were availed of by the Smithsonian Institution to superintend its labors in this field, and to his energy and complete knowledge of the subject it greatly owes its success in this branch of the service. The valuable and laborious service which he rendered' to the Institution was entirely gratuitous, and in his death that establishment as well as the cause of science lost an ardent friend and an important contributor to its advancement. In 1871 Mr. Gibbs married his cousin, Miss Mary K. Gibbs, of Newport, R. I., and removed to New Haven, where he died on the 9th of April, 1873. [Gill (John Kaye).] Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon | with examples of | Use in Conversation. | (Compiled from \ all vocabularies, and greatly improved | by the addition of necessary words | never before published.) | Ninth edition. | Portland, Oregon: | published by J. K. Gill & co. | 93 First Street. [1882.] Cover title.- A complete | dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon. | English-Chinook and Chinook-English. | Ninth edition. | Revised, Corrected and Enlarged. | Portland, Oregon. | J. K. Gill & co., publishers. | 1882. | Himes the printer. Cover title, title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. 3-4, text pp. 5-62,18°. English and Chinook, double columns, alphabetically arranged, pp. 5-33.—Numerals 1-12,20,30,100,1000, p. 33.—Chinook and English, alphabetically arranged, pp. 34-57.—Conversations, pp. 58-60.—The Lord's prayer, with interlinear English translation, pp. 61-62. Copies seen: Eames,Pilling. In the preparation of this dictionary Mr. Gill had, he informs me, the assistance of Rev. W. C. Chaltin. An eighth edition was published in 1878, in continuation of those issued by the firm of S. J. McCormick (see Blanchet (F.N.), whose stock was purchased by thefirm of which Mr. Gill was a member. Of that edition I have been unable to locate a copy. "The first attempt at publication of the trappers' and traders' Indian Jargon in use among the coast and interior tribes of the Northwest was made in 1825, by a sailor [John R. Jewitt] who was captured from the ship Gill (J. K.) — Continued. Boston, which was surprised by the Indians at Nootka Sound, her captain and crew murdered, the sailor who issued his adventures under the title, ' The Captive in Nootka' and later the ' Traders' Dictionary,' being the only sur' vivor. '' Several little books, mostly for traders' use, have been printed in this Jargon. A worthy missionary [Rev. Myron Eells] published quite a number of hymns translated from English, in Chinook, which has been tbe only use of the language in the field of belles-lettres. " The language of the native Indians is seldom heard. The progressive English is forcing its way even into the lodges of the most savage tribes; and many of the original Indian dialects of the coast, of which Chinook was the most important, have disappeared entirely, with the nations that spoke them. " Of the ancient languages of the Chinooks, but two hundred words are given in the present dictionary, the remainder being words from other coast tribes, Yakimas, Wascos, Nez Perces, and other tongues."—Preface. Mr. Gill's statement in regard to the "first attempt at publication of the trappers' and traders' Indian Jargon," quoted above, needs a word of correction. Jewitt's work, first issued under the title of "A j ournal kept at Nootka Sound," Boston, 1807, contains no linguistic material. Later itwas published with thetitle "A narrative of the adventures and sufferings of John R. Jewitt," Middletown, Connecticut, 1815, and went through a number of editions. This work does not contain a Jargon vocabulary at all, but one in the Nootka language (Wakashan family). The work entitled " The Captive in Nootka" is not by Jewitt, but is a compilation from his work by S. G. Goodrich (Peter Parley), and was first issued, so far as I know, Philadelphia, 1832. It contains a few Nootka words and phrases passim, but no vocabulary. Of the Traders' Dictionary, by Jewitt, of which Mr. Gill speaks-, I have been unable to trace a single copy. [ ] Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon | with examples of | Its Use in Conversation. | Compiled from all existing vocabularies, and greatly | improved by the addition of necessary | words never before published. | Tenth edition. | Portland, Oregon: |-published by J. K. Gill & co. | 1884. Cover title: Gill's | complete dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon. | English-Chinook and Chinook-English. | Tenth edition, | Revised, Corrected and Enlarged. ] Portland, Oregon: | J. K. Gill & co., publishers. | 1884. Cover title, title verso name of printer 1 1. preface signed J. K. Gill & co. pp. 5-6, text pp. 7-60,18°. A ■t "Iff"' •v CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 35 Gill (J. K.) — Continued. English-Chinook dictionary, double oolumns, alphabetically arranged, pp. 7-32.—Numerals, p. 32 Chinook-English dictionary, alphabetically arranged, pp. 33-54.—Conversations, English-Chinook, pp. 55-58.—Lord's prayer, with interlinear English translation, pp. 59-60. Copies seen: Boston Athenseum, British Museum, Eames, Pilling. [ ] Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon | with examples of | Use in Conversation. | (Compiled from all vocabularies, and greatly im-1 proved by the addition of necessary words | never before published.) | Eleventh edition. [ 1887. | Portland, Oregon: | published by J. K. Gill & co., | Booksellers and Stationers. Cover title: Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | [Design] | English-Chinook and Chinook-English. | Eleventh edition. | Revised, Corrected and Enlarged. | Portland, Oregon: | J. K. Gill & co., publishers. | 1887. Cover title, title verso blank 11. explanatory suggestions verso blank 1 1. preface (unsigned and dated Jan. 1,1887) pp. 5-6, text pp. 7-60,18°. Linguistic contents as in tenth edition titled next above. Copies seen: Harvard. Gill's | dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon | with examples of | Use in Conversation. | (Compiled from all vocabularies, and greatly im- | proved by the addition of necessary words | never before published.) | Twefth edition. | 1889. | Portland,Oregon: | published by J. K. Gill & co., | Booksellers and Stationers. Cover title: Gill's | dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | [Picture of an Indian.] | English - Chinook and Chinook - English. | Twelfth edition. | Revised, Corrected and Enlarged. | Portland, Oregon: | J.K. Gill & co., publishers. 11889. | Swope & Taylor, printers. Cover title, title verso copyright (1889) 1 1. explanatory suggestions pp. 3-4, preface pp. 5- 6, text pp. 7-63,18°. English-Chinook dictionary, double columns, alphabetically arranged, pp. 7-32.—Numerals, p. 32.—Chinook-English vocabulary, alphabetically arranged, pp. 33-54.—Conversation, English-Chinook, pp.55-58.—Lord's prayerin Jargon, with interlinear English translation, pp. 59-60. — Appendix, English-Chinook, double columns, alphabetically arranged, pp. 61-63. Copies seen: Pilling. Gill's | dictionary [ of the | Chinook Jargon | with examples of | Use in Con- Gill (J. K.) — Continued, versation. | (Compiled from all vocabularies, and greatly im- | proved by the addition of necessary words | never before published.) | Thirteenth edition. | Portland, Oregon: | Published by J. K. Gill & Co., | Booksellers and Stationers. 11891. Cover title.- Gill's dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon. | [Picture of an Indian.] | English - Chinook and Chinook - English. | Thirteenth edition. | Revised, corrected and enlarged.| Portland, Oregon: | J. K. Gill & Co., publishers. 11891. | S.C. Beach, printer. Cover title, title verso copyright (1891) 1 1. explanatory suggestions pp. 3-4, preface pp. 5- 6, text pp. 7-63,18°. English-Chinook, double columns, alphabetically arranged, pp. 7-32.— Numerals 1-12,20, 30,100,1000, p. 32 Chinook-English, alphabetically arranged, pp. 33-54.—Conversation, pp. 55-58.—The Lord's prayer, with interlinear English translation, pp. 58-60. — Appendix, English-Chinook, pp. 61-63. Copies seen: Pilling. In response to certain inquiries of mine, Mr. Gill writes me, under date of November 19,1891, as follows: "In your favor of October 27th you request us to supply you with a copy of each edition of the Chinook Jargon which we have published, and also to state what we may be ablein regard to the bibliography ot the Chinookanlanguages. '' So far as the Chinook Dictionary published by MoCormiok is concerned [see Blanchet (F. N.)], we doubt very much whether we could find, without advertising, a single copy of it at this time. We received from McCormick & Co. s ome dozens of them of different dates of publication, but uniform as to contents, when we bought the dictionary from them. Weeither disposed of or destroyed them years ago. It is now about twelve years since we began the publication of our Dictionary of Chinook. The dictator of this letter compiled our dictionary and added hundreds of necessary words to the vocabulary of the English-Chinook, which is yet quite insufficient as a dictionary for ordinary civilized people, but more than equal to the demands of the Indians and settlers for whom it was intended. It is, at least, quite as extensive as need be, but not, perhaps, so well selected. I flatter myself that the dictionary we produced in 1878, which I believe was our earliest publication of it, was the first one based upon a right conception of the origin of many of the words comprising the Chinook vocabulary, and also a phonetic basis which should produce the form of all Chinook words and the simplest style corresponding to our method of writing English. We have just issued a thirteenth edition of this dictionary, 36 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Gill (J. K.) —Continued. which corresponds with the last two. We also send you a copy of the ninth edition, which I believe represents the previous eight editions and the succeeding ones up to the eleventh. The work was stereotyped when we got out our first edition, and the only change has been in the preface and appendix. I have learned much about the Chinook Jargon and other Indian tongues since the compilation of the first dictionary, and if it were to be rewritten to-day I should make some very slight changes in the book. I do not think the changes required would affect more than twelve of the root-words of the Chinook, but I should make some research into the literature of the early part of this century and pass some time among the Indians most proficient in the Chinook to find if possible the words used intertribally for 'coyote,' 'rock,' 'fir,' 'maple,' 'mountain,' 'hill,' the names of different parts of the human body, its diseases, and many other subjects and things which must have been referred to by words in common use before the white people came to this region, but which the compilers of the early dictionaries seem to have entirely neglected. "When I began the compilation of our own it was only because we had to have a new edition of the dictionary. The head of our firm considered the old one was I plenty good enough,' and for that reason my labors in increasing the vocabulary, both Chinook and English, were greatly curtailed. His view of the matter was a business one, however, and mine the impracticable side of it. Probably within the time we have been publishing this dictionary (thirteen years) the Indians who were restricted to the use of Chinook in conversation with the settlers of the North Pacific coast have decreased more than one-half in number. A great portion of these have died or been killed by our enterprising settlers (the probable reason for this killing being that the Indians lived upon lands our people wanted; an example which they have had before them since the settlement of Manhattan and which they have not been slow to follow). Chinook is becoming a joke on the Pacific coast. White people learn it for the sake of attempting to talk with Indians, who speak just as good English as their would-be patrons and interlocutors. The sale for the books slowly decreases also. "You are probably aware that during the last year a valuable book upon the Chinook was issued in London, written by Horatio Hale, M. A., F. R. S. C. It is the most ambitious publication on this subject which has ever been attempted, and to me it is a marvel that this work should have seen the light in London, so remote from any apparent interest in, or knowledge of, the Chinook. If you have it you will find that Mr. Hale has followed nearly the same system of spelling as that I adopted a dozen years ago. I judge that my dictionary was his model, to some extent, from the fact Gill (J. K.) — Continued. that he spells the word kloshe as I do; also klone, klook, etc., which in some of the other vocabularies have been spelled with a 'c' instead of ' k' and with a final' se' instead of ' she,' and, in fact, three or four different ways of spelling for the same word. Mr. Hale uses kluh for the verb to tear, to rend, to plow, etc.. " Now, this word, as I hear it spoken among the Indians, ends gutturaily, and for that reason I spelled.it as I have heard it pronounced, klugh. Mr. Hale accents the last syllable of klahane and spells the last syllable nie, which would make his pronounciation of the word very different from mine. Mine, I know, is the common, in fact, universal expression. I am often moved to open a correspondence with Mr. Hale on the subject of his book because of his iconoclasm. He attempts to prove too much, as I believe, and would make it appear that Chinook did not exist as an intertribal language prior to its necessity for the use of the trapper and the trader. I am convinced of the contrary. Within the year I have talked with an Indian who was a man grown when Lewis and Clarke came to this country, and have his assurance thatthe Klikitat, Multnomah, Clatsop, Chinook, and other tribes all talked to each other in this ancient Volapuk upon matters of business or any other inter-tribal affairs, while each tribe -had its own language. I have said something on this subject in the preface to our dictionary. Mr. Hale's book has given me much pleasure in reading over his collection of Chinook romantic songs and examples of the common use of the language. It is not strange if there should be a wide difference in the pronunciation and use of the language between San Francisco Bay and Sitka, between the mouth of the Columbia and the top of the Rocky Mountains. "Mr. Halo mentions one or two hooks or pamphlets which I have not seen, but shall take my first opportunity to prooure, giving more space to the Chinook. " I inclose you several books which I think you will be glad to get. . . . "You will see that none of these different books attempt to give the accent, and leave the learner entirely at a loss as to the force of the words. For instance, the Chinook word for blanket, pasesee (spelled in two or three ways by tho different publishers), is properly pronounced with the accent on the seoond syllable. You will see how very different the word becomes if you attempt to accent the first or last syllables. I can assure you that there, are no differences in our publications of the Chinook dictionary excepting what I have referred to in the two examples sent you. The books from other sources which I send are the only editions which had appeared at the time I procured them and I think they have none of them been duplicated since." In response to criticism made by mein regard to the above, more especially of that portion of it relating to Jewitt's work (see under first CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 37 Gill (J. K.) — Continued. Gill title above), Mr. Gill writes me, under date of October 6,1892, as follows: "As to my argument that the Jargon was of an earlier date than 1820,1 have to say that I went rapidly last evening through my copy of Jewitt's "Captive of Nootka" (1861), and found scattered through the following words, which I am sure have a relation more than accidental to the present Chinook. "Jewitt uses the word pow for the firing of a gun. He speaks of an edible root called qua- noose and another, yama, the latter doubtless a form of kamas and the former probably of house, both of which roots are still eaten by many of our primitive Indians. Jfyceis identical with the present word for the deity or anything great. Pelth-pelth is evidently pil-pil; peshak (bad) is also identical. Three other words used by Jewitt, kutsak, quahootze, and ahwelth, are all rather familiar to me in sound, and if I had time to hunt them up I believe I could connect two of them with Chinook readily. "Now, I do not claim that the Chinook Jargon originated at the mouth of the Columbia River, where the Chinook Indians lived, but that it was an intertribal language of quite ancient date, and used at first by the coast tribes, whose intercourse was much more frequent than those of the interior. It spread by the Columbia River and through waterways, at last reaching the Rocky Mountains, and covered the coast from San Francisco Bay to the Arctic. As the trading was done largely at Nootka Sound a century ago, thai language would naturally be largely represented in such a jargon, but the fact that the oldest white people who have made any records of this Oregonregion have used tyee as a name for God, chuck for water, kloshe for good, etc., and that the same things are found in the Nootka and other northern tongues, other than the original Jargon, seems to me only to prove my position. Jewitt encountered these words as long ago as 1803, which certainly gives me reason for my theory that the Chinook is of an earlier date than opponents concede. The whole of Jewitt's narrative is so palpably that of a simple, old- time sailor spinning his yarn, which bears internal evidence of its truth, and which agrees with established facts and circumstances on this northwest coast, that it leaves us no doubt as to tho existence of most of the things he speaks of, though he was not a man of sufficient observation and experience to make the best use of his opportunities. When he wrote - yama for kamass it may have been days or months from the time of hearing it, and wrote his remembrance, perhaps, of a word which may have been pronounced differently when he actually heard it. Authors who have edited Jewitt's work have taken some liberties withhis text, and improved, according to their notions, upon it. Like that^Scotch pastor who, hearing Shakespeare's' Sermons in stones, books in the running brooks,' and being convinced that the Gill (J. K.) —• Continued. printer had done the poet injustice, said: 'Ay, he meant sermons in books, stones in the running brooks,' so many a simple story is made to serve the purpose of pedagogism and quite loses its intended character. " The Nootka Indians in 1803, when Jewitt was among them, were in the habit of using the words which I have quoted above among themselves. There were no whites in the country excepting Jewitt and his companions, and the inference is that the Indians used only the language which was familiar to them, and not in any sense to accommodate their expression to Jewitt's comprehension. In speaking with strangers of other tribes, however, they would probably do what Americans who converse with Germans sometimes do, that is, interpolate • German words (if they know any) in their English conversation, with the idea that they exhibit their own knowledge, or that they set their auditor at ease. As Jewitt was of a different race, the use of the words above may have been impressed upon him rather than the words which may have been in use for the same things in the nati ve tongue of the Nootkas. But if the words are Nootka, as you insist, and I am willing to admit they may be, there is no doubt about their having been transplanted to the mouth of the Columbia and having spread into the interior of the Pacific Slope—a transplanting which may have been from either source, asyoncanreadilysee. Andas the earliest whites on the Columbia heard the same words in use by Indians who spoke languages which were Greek to the Indians on Puget Sound and Vancouver Island, the fact is all the more certainly established that many words were common among a number of tribes who had their own native words also for the same things. As Jewitt gives but a dozen or less Indian words altogether in the edition of his book which I have, and at least six of them are congeners of the Chinook, I am inclined to think that if he had used sixty words of the people among whom he lived, he might have shown us the same proportion of Chinook words, and it is but fair to consider that he would not have chosen only words which were of-this common Jargon." Mr. Gill's comments were forwarded by me toMr.Horatio Hale,the author.of the "Manual of the Oregon trade language or Chinook Jargon" referred to by Mr. Gill, who comments as follows: "In preparing my account of the Chinook Jargon for the enterprising London publishers, Messrs. Whittaker & Co., I had not the advantage of being able to refer to Mr. Gill's dictionary, which I have never seen. From his account of it, I have no doubt that it would have been of material service in my task. His care in marking the accented syllables is a scholarly precaution which compilers of such vocabularies are too apt to neglect. "My materials were derived mainly from my own collections, made in Oregon in 1841, \ 38 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE ~M yu iifJ Gill (J. K.) — Continued. and published in 1846 in my volume of the U. S. Exploring Expedition series. These were supplemented by later information obtained from the excellent dictionary of George Gibbs and from the letters and publications of Mr. Eells and Dr. Boas. I should have preferred to retain the ' scientific orthography' (consonants as in English, vowels as in Italian) which was adopted in my former work; but as the Jargon has now become, through its use by the missionaries and others, a written language with the English orthography, it seemed proper to adopt that spelling, merely adding the scientific forms in parentheses as a guide to the pronunciation. "The word meaning out, which Mr. Gill spells klahane (dividing it in his dictionary, I presume, to show that it is a trisyllable) is written by Mr. Eells in his sermon printed in my Jargon volume (p. 32) klahanie (klahanie kopa town, out of town), and by Mr. Gibbs, klah- hanie, or klagh-anie, with the accent affixed to the last syllable. The Jargon has several trisyllables of this sort, such as saghalie or sah- hatie, above, keekwilee, below, itlahie, earth, which are variously written, and are accented indifferently on the first or on the last syllable. "In Mr. Gill's suggestion that 'Chinook existed as an intertribal language prior to the necessity of the use of the trapper and trader,' he evidently confounds, as many do, the proper Chinook language with the Jargon, or artificial trade language. The Indians of Oregon territory were quick in learning languages, and some of them could speak five or six native idioms. The genuine Chinook, being spoken by a tribe holding a central position along the Columbia River, and much given to trade, would naturally be known to many natives of other tribes, and would be frequently spoken in intertribal intercourse, like the Chippewa among the eastern Indians and the Malay in the East Indian Archipelago. This was doubtless what was meant by Mr. Gill's aged native informant in referring to the Chinook as the common ■ medium of intercourse before the white trad ers ■ visited the country. That he could have referred to the Jargon is simply impossible, as tbe internal evidence of its structure sufficiently shows. "Both philology and ethnography are much - indebted to the thoughtful labors of intelligent inquirers like Mr. Gill in preserving these inter- : estingrelics of vanishing idioms and aboriginal • customs. I ought, perhaps, to add that though the use of the Jargon is dying out, for the reason which Mr. Gill so pithily gives, in the country of its origin—the Pacific coast region . south of Puget Sound—it is extending in British Columbia and Alaska, and seems likely to do good service there for many years to come." Gill's complete dictionary of the Chinook . Jargon. See Gill (J. K.) Gill's dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. (1889-1891.) See Gill (J. K.) Good (Rev. John Booth). A vocabulary | and | outlines of grammar | of the | Nitlakapamuk | or | Thompson tongue, | (The Indian language spoken, between Yale, Lillooet, | Cache Creek and Nicola Lake.) | Together with a | Phonetic Chinook Dictionary, | Adapted for use in the Province of | British Columbia. | By J. B. Good, S. P. G. missionary, Yale-Lytton. | By aid of a Grant from the Right Hon. Superintendent of Indian | Affairs, Ottawa. | Victoria: | Printed by the St. Paul's Mission Press, (S.P.C.K.) | Collegiate School, 1880. Cover title differing from the above in one line of the imprint only ("Victoria, B.C.:"), title as above verso blank 1 1. preface pp. 5-6, text pp. 8-46, 8°. Chinook [Jargon] dictionary. English-Chinook, alphabetically arranged, in double columns, containing about 750 words and the numeralsl-11,20, 30,100.1000, occupies the even numbered pages 8-30, the Thompson vocabulary occurring on the alternate, odd-numbered pages.— Conversations, English-Chinook, pp. 32,34.—TheLord's prayer in Jargon, with interlinear translation in English, p. 34. Copies seen: Bancroft, Dunbar, Eames, Mallet, Pilling, Wellesley. Grammar: Chinook Grammatic comments: Chinook Chinook Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Watlala Grammatic treatise: Chinook Chinook Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon See Boas (F.) See Gallatin (A.) Hale (H.) Crane (A.) Eells (M.) Hale (H.) Bancroft (H.H.) See Boas (F.) Miiller (F.) Bulmer (T.S.) | Demers (M.) et al. Hale (H.) Grasserie (Raoul de la). Etudes | de | grammaire compared | Des relations grammaticales | considerees dans leur 9 concept et dans leur expression | ou de la | categorie des cas | par | Raoul de la Grasserie | docteur en droit | Juge au Tribunal de Rennes | Membre de la Socie^ de Linguistique de Paris. | Paris | Jean Maisonneuve, 6diteur | 25, quai Voltaire, [ 25 | 1890 Printed cover as above, half-title verso blank 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 11. text pp. 1-344, contents pp. 345- 351.8°. CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 39 Grasserie (R.)— Continued. Examples from several North American languages are made use of by the author: Nahuatl, Dakota, Othomi, Maya, Qnicb.6, Totonaque, Iroquois. Athapaske, Chiapaneque, Sahaptba, Tcherokess, Algonquin, Tarasque, Esquimau, Tchinuk, Choctaw, pp. 17,68,69,70,71,72,73,74, 84,129-132,133,177,325-326,394,395. Copies seen: Gatschet. Greely: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of Gen: A. W. Greely, Washington, T>. C. Green (J. S.) Extracts from the report of an exploring tour on the northwest coast of North America in 1829, by Rev. J. S. Green. In the Missionary Herald, vol. 26, pp. 343-345, Boston [1830], 8°. (Pilling.) "Their language," p. 344, includes four phrases in the language of Queen Charlotte Island compared with the same in the Jargon of the tribes. Guide-Book to the Gold Regions of Frazer River. With a map of the different routes, &c. New York, 1858. (*) 55 pp. 24°. A vocabulary of the Jargon, pp. 45-55. Title and note from Gibbs's Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. Guide | to the province of | British Columbia, | for | 1877-8. | Compiled from the latest and most authentic sources | of information. | Victoria: | T.N. Hibben & co., publishers. | 1877. Title verso copyright notice (1877) and name of printer 1 1. preface verso blank 11. contents pp. v-xii, text pp. 1-374, advertisements pp. 375-410,8°. Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. Indian trade language of the Pacifio coast. Part I. Chinook-English, pp. 232-239.—Part H. English-Chinook, pp. 240-249. Each alphabetically arranged. Copies seen .* British Museum, Eames, Pilling. H. Haines (Elijah Middlebrook). The | American Indian | (Uh-nish-in-na-ba). | The Whole Subject Complete in One Volume | Illustrated with Numerous Appropriate Engravings. | By Elijah M.Haines. | [Design.] | Chicago: | the Mas-sin-n:i-gan company, | 1888. Title verso copyright notice (1888) etc. 1 1. preface pp. vii-viii, contents and list of illustrations pp. 9-22, text pp. 23-821, large 8°. Chapter vi, Indian tribes, pp. 121-171, gives special lists and a general alphabetic list of the tribes of North America, derivations of tribal names being frequently given; among them the Chinook, pp. 131-132.—Chapter ix. Indian languages (pp. 184-212) contains much linguistic material relating to the North Ameri- can peoples; amongst it'' the Chinook Jargon,'' which includes a general discussion of the language, p. 211, and a vocabulary of 90 words, alphabetically arranged by English words, pp. 211-212.—Chapter xxxvi. Numerals and the use of numbers (pp. 433-451) includes tbe numerals 1-12, 20, 100 (from Schoolcraft), p. 445.— Chapter lv. Vocabularies (668-703) includes a "Vocabulary comparing pronouns and other parts of speech (I, thou, he, yes, no) in the dialects of various Indian tribes, among them the Chinook, p. 676. Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling. Haldeman (Samuel Stehmau). Analytic orthography: | an | investigation of the sounds of Jihe^oicei| and their | alpha- " betic notation; | including | the mechanism of speech, | and its bearing upon Haldeman (S. S.) — Continued. | etymology. | By | S. S. Haldeman, A. M., | professor in Delaware college; | member [&c. six lines.] | Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & co. | London: Triibner & co. Paris: Benjamin Duprat. I Berlin: Ferd. Diimm- ler. | 1860. Half-title (Trevelyanprize essay) verso blank 11. tiileverso blank 11. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp. vii-viii, slip of additional corrections, text pp. 5-147, corrections and additions p. 148,4°. Numerals 1-10 in a number of American languages, among them the Chinook, "dictated by Dr. J. K. Townsend," p. 146. Copies seen: Boston Athenseum, British Museum, Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Trumbull. First printed in American Philosoph. Soc. Trans, new series, vol. 11. (*) Samuel Stehmau Haldeman, naturalist, was born in Locust Grove, Lancaster County, Pa., August 12,1812; died in Chiokies, Pa., September 10,1880. He was educated at a classical school in Harrisburg and then spent two years in Dickinson College. In 1836 Henry D. Rogers, having been appointed State geologist of New Jersey, sent for Mr. Haldeman, who had been his pupil at Dickinson, to assist him. A year later, on the reorganization of the Pennsylvania geological survey, Haldeman was transferred to his own State, and was actively engaged on the survey until 1842. He made extensive researches among Indian dialects ami also in Pennsy] van ia I >u t oh, besidesin- vestigatious in the English, Chinese, and other languages—.Appleton's Cyclop, of Am. Ii lug. 40 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Hale (Horatio). United States [ exploring expedition. | During the years | 1838/1839,1840, 1841,1842. | Under the command of | Charles Wilkes, U. S. N. | Vol. VI. | Ethnography and philology- I By | Horatio Hale, | philologist of the expedition. | Philadelphia: | printed by C. Sherman. | 1846. Half-title (United States exploring expedition, by authority of Congress) verso blank 11. title verso blank 11. contents pp. v-vii, alphabet pp. ix-xii, half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3- 666, map, 4°. Languages of northwestern America (pp. 553-650) contains general remarks and examples of the languages of the peoples of that region, including the Tshinuk family, pp. 562- 564.—Remarks on the vocabularies, pp. 567- 568. — Vocabulary (600 words) of the Tshinuk (Watlala or Cascade Indians, Nihaloitih or Echeloots, Tshinuk, Tlatsop or Clatsops, Wakaikam or Wahkyecums), pp. 570-629.—The "Jargon" or trade, language of Oregon (pp. 635-650) contains remarks on its origin, pp. 635- 636.—Lists of 17 words derived from the Nootka, 41 words from the English, 100 words from the Tshinuk, 33 words from the French, 12 words by onomatopoeia, and 38 doubtful, pp. 636-639.—Remarks on the phonology, grammar, etc. (including the numerals 1-10,100, and the pronouns), pp. 640-644.—Short sentences with English equivalents, ppi 644-646 Vocabulary (English-Chinook, about 325 words), pp. 646-650. For a reprint of much of this material see Gallatin (A.) Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Congress, Lenox, Trumbull. At the Squier sale, no. 446, a copy brought $13; at the Murphy sale, no. 1123, half maroon morocco, top edge gilt, $13. Issued also with the following title: United States | exploring expedition. | During the years | 1838, 1839, 1840,1841,1842. | Under the command of | Charles Wilkes, U. S. N. | Ethnography and philology. | By | Horatio Hale, | philologist of the expedition. | Philadelphia: | Lea and Blanchard. 11846. Half-title (United States exploring expedition) verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-vii, alphabet pp. ix-xii, half-title verso blank 11. text pp. 3-666, map, 4°. Linguistic contents as under title next above. Copies seen: Eames, Lenox. Was America peopled from Polynesia? In Congres Int. des Americanistes, Compte- rendu, 7th session, pp. 375-387, Berlin, 1890,8°. (Eames, Pilling.) Hale (H.) — Continued. Table of the pronouns I, thou, we (inc.),i»e (exc), ye, and they in the languages of Polynesia and of western America, pp. 386-387, includes the Tshinuk, p. 386, line 21. Issued separately with title-page as follows: Was America peopled from Polynesia? | A study in comparative Philology- I By | Horatio Hale. | From the Proceedings of the International Congress of Americanists | at Berlin, in October 1888. | Berlin 1890. | Printed by H. S. Hermann. Title verso blank 11. text pp. 3-15,8°. Pronouns in the languages of Polynesia and of western America, including the Tshinuk, p. 14. Copies seen: Piliing, Wellesley. An international idiom. | A manual of the | Oregon trade language, | or | " Chinook Jargon." | By Horatio Hale, M.A., F. R. S. C, | member [&c. six lines.] | London: | Whittaker & co., White Hart Street, | Paternoster square. | 1890. Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names of printers 1 1. prefatory note verso extract from a work by Quatrefages 1 1. contents verso blank 11. text pp. 1-63,16°. The Oregon trade language, pp. 1-3.—Its origin and composition, pp. 3-9,—Orthography and pronunciation (pp. 9-12) includes three short comparative vocabularies—Chinook, Chinook Jargon, and meaning; English, Jargon, and meaning; French, Jargon, and meaning, pp. 9- 11.—Grammar, including numerals and a list of pronouns, pp. 12-19.—The past and future of the Jargon, pp. 19-21.—The language as spoken (pp. 22-38) includes a list of sentences and phrases, pp. 22-23; songs (from Swan and Boas) with English translations, pp. 24-25; hymns (fromEells), with English translation,pp. 26-27; sermon (from Eells's manuscript), in English, pp. 28-31; the same in Jargon, with interlinear English translation, pp. 32-37; the Lord's prayer (from Eells) in Jargon, with interlinear translation into English, pp. 37-38.—Trade language, alphabetically arranged, in double columns, by Jargon words, pp. 39-52.—English and trade Ian guage, alphabetically arranged, in double columns, by English words, pp. 53-63. "This dictionary, it should be stated, is,in the main, a copy (with some additions and corrections) of that of George Gibbs [q. v.], published by the Smithsonian Institution in 1863, and nowregarded as the standard authority, so far as any can be said to exist; but it may be added that the principal part of that collection was avowedly derived by the estimable com- CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 41 ;Hale(H.)— Continued. piler from my own vocabulary, publi shed seventeen years before." Copies seen.- Eames, Pilling. For critical reviews of this work, see Oha- rencey (H. de), Orane (A.), Leland (C. G.), Reade (J.), and Western. Horatio Hale, ethnologist, born in Newport, N. H., May3,1817, was graduated at Harvard in 1837 and was appointed in the same year philolo- I gist to the United States exploring expedition under Capt. Charles Wilkes. In this capacity he studied a large number of the languages of the Pacific islands, as well as of North and South America, Australia, and Africa, and also investigated the history, traditions, and customs of the tribes speaking those languages. The results of his inquiries are given in his Ethnography and Philology (Philadelphia, 1846), which forms the seventh volume of the expedition reports. He has published numerous memoirs on -anthropology and ethnology, is a member of many learned societies, both in Europe and in America, and in 1886 was vice- president of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, presiding over the section of anthropology.—Appleton's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. Harvard: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. [Hayden (Ferdinand Vandever)], in charge. Department of the interior. | Bulletin | of) the United States | Geological and geographical survey | of | the territories. | No. l[-Vol. VI]. | Washington: | Government printing office. | 1874 [-1881]. 6 vols. 8°. Sells (M.), The Twana Indians, vol. 3, pp. 57- 114. Copies seen: Geological Survey. Hazlitt (WiUiam Carew). British Columbia, | and | Vancouver island; | comprising | a historical sketch of the British settlements | in the north-west coast of America; | And a Survey of the | physical character, capabilities, climate, topography, | natural history, geology and ethnology | of that region; | Compiled from Official and other Hazlitt (W. C.) — Continued. Authentic Sources. | By | William Carew Hazlitt, | author of [&c. two lines.] | With a map. | London: | G.Routledge & co., Far- ringdon street. | New York: | 18 Beek- man street. | 1858. | (The author reserves the right of Translation.) Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names of printers 1 1. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp. vii-viii, text pp. 1-240, appendix pp. 241-247, colophon p. 248,16°. Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon (365 words and phrases, and the numerals 1-12,100, 1000) from the San Francisco Bulletin, June 4 [1858], pp. 241-243. See Chinook. Copies seen: Bancroft, British Museum, Congress, Harvard. The | great gold fields of | Cariboo; | with an authentic description, brought down | to the latest period, | of | British Columbia | and | Vancouver island. | By William Carew Hazlitt, | of the Inner temple, barrister-at-law. | With an accurate map. | London: | Routledge, Warne, and Routledge, | Farringdon street. | New York: 56, Walker street. | 1862. Title verso names of printers 11. preface pp. iii-v, contents pp. vii-viii, text pp. 1-165, appendices pp. 166-184.16°. Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon as noted under title next above, pp. 179-180. Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- nssum. This author's Cariboo, the newly discovered gold fields of British Columbia, London, 1862, does not contain the vocabulary. Hymn-book: Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Hymns: Cascade Chinook Chinook Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon See Eells (M.) Le Jeune (J. M. R.) See Lef (D.) and Frost (J. H.) Blanchet (F. N.) Tate (CM.) Bulmer (T. S.) Demers (M.) et al. Everette (W.E.) Eells (M.) Hale (H.) Macleod (X. D.) St.Onge (L.N.) . 42 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE w D Jacques Cartier School: These words following a title or inclosed within parentheses after a note indicate that a copy of the work referred -to has been seen by the compiler in the library of that institution, Montreal. Jehan (Louis-Francois). Troisieme et derniere | Encyclop<Sdie theblogique, | [&c. twenty-four lines] | publico | par M. l'abbe' Migne | [&c. six lines.] | Tome trente-quatrieme. | Dictionnaire de linguistique. | Tome unique. | Prix: 7 francs. | S'lmprime et se vend chez J.-P. Migne, eVliteur, | aux ateliers catholiques, rue d'Amboise, au Petit-Montrouge, | Barriere d'enfer de Paris. | 1858. Second title: Dictionnaire | de | linguistique | et | de philologie comparee. | Histoire de toutes les langues mortes et vivantes, | ou | traite completd'idiomographie, | embrassant | l'examen critique des systemes et de toutes les questions qui se rattachent | h l'origine et a la filiation des langues, a leur essence organique | et a leurs rapports avec l'histoire des races humaines, de leurs migrations, etc. | Preced6 d'un | Essai sur le rdle du langage dans l'evo- lution de 1'intelligence humaine. | Par L.-F. Jehan (de Saint-Clavien), | Membre de la Soci- ete geologique de France, de 1' Academie royale des sciences de Turin, etc. | [Quotation, three lines.] | Publie | parM. l'Abb6 Migne, | editeur de la Bibliotheque universelle du clerge, | ou | des cours complete sur chaque branche de la science ecclesiastique. | Tome unique. | Prix: 7 francs. | S'lmprime et se vend chez J.-P. Migne, editeur, | aux ateliers catholiques, rue d'Amboise, au Petit-Montrouge, I Barriere d'enfer de Paris. 11858. Outside title 1 1. titles as above 2 11. columns (two to a page) 9-1448, large 8°. See under title next below for linguistic contents. Copies seen; British Museum. Troisieme et derniere | Encyclopedic | theblogique, | ou troisieme et derniere | serie de dictionnaires sur toutes les parties de la science religieuse, | ofl'rant en francais, et par ordre alpha- belaque, | la plus claire, la plus facile, la plus commode, la plus variee | et la plus complete des theologies: | [&c. Jehan (L. F.) — Continued, seventeen lines] [publiee | par M. l'abbe' Migne, | [&c. six lines.] | Tome trente- quatrieme. | Dictionnaire de linguistique. | Tome unique. | Prix: 8francs. | S'impr ime et se vend chez J. -P. Migne, e'diteur, | aux ateliers catholiques, rue d'Amboise, 20, au Petit-Montrouge, | autrefois Barriere d'enfer de Paris, maintenant dans Paris. | 1864 Second title.- Dictionnaire | de | linguistiq»e | et | de philologie comparee. | Histoire de toutes | les langues mortes et vivantes, | ou | traite complet d'idiomographie, | embrassant | l'examen critique des systemes et de toutes les questions qui se rattachent | a l'origine et a la filiation des langues, a leur essence organique | et a leurs rapports avec l'histoire des races humaines, de leurs migrations, etc. | Precede d'un | Essai sur le r61e du langage dans revolution de l'intelligence humaine. | Par L.-F. Jehan (de Saint-Clavien), | Membre de la Soci- ete geologique de France, del'Academie royale des sciences de Turin, etc. | [Quotation, three lines.] | Publie | par M. l'abbe Migne, editeur de la Bibliotheque universelle du clerge, | ou I des cours complete sur chaque branche de la science ecclesiastique. | Tome unique. | Prix: 7 francs. I S'imprime et se vend chez J.-P. Migne, editeur, | aux ateliers catholiques, rue d'Amboise, 20, au Petit-Montrouge, | autrefois Barriere d'enfer de Paris, maintenant dans Paris. 11864 First title verso "avis important" 11. second title verso printer 1 1. introduction numbered by columns 9-208, text in double columns 209- 1250, notes additionnelles columns 1249-1432, table des matieres columns 1433-1448, large 8°. The article "Colombienne," columns 435-436, contains a brief enumeration only of the tribes speaking languages of five different families, of which two are Chinook, viz: 2° Colombienne inferieure, including the dialects of the Echeloots, the Skilloots, the Wah- kiacum, the Cathlamahs, the Chinnooks, the Clatsops, and the Chilts. 3° jMultnomah, including the dialects of the Multnomah, the Cathlacumup, the Cathlanah- quiah, the Cathlacomatnp, the Clannahmina- iiiuin, the Clahnaquah, the Quathlapottes, the Shotos, the Cathlahaws, and the Clackumos. Copies seen: Eames. Johnson (Frank). See Gatschet (A. S.) Jiilg (B.) See Vater (J. S.) CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 43 K. Keane (Augustus H.) Ethnography and philology of America. By A. H. Keane. In Bates (H. W.), Central America, the West Indies, etc. pp. 443-561, London, 1878,8°. General scheme of American races and languages (pp. 460-497) includes a list of the branches of the Chinookan family, divided into languages and dialects, p. 474. —Alphabetical list of all known American tribes and languages, pp. 498-561. Reprinted in the 1882 and 1885 editions of the same work and on the same pages. Keane (A. H.) — Continued. American Indians. Tn Encyclopaedia Britannica, ninth edition, vol. 12, pp. 822-830, New York, 1881, royal 8°. Columbia Races, p. 826, includes thediVisions of the Chinookan. Knipe (Rev. C.) [Comparative vocabn^ lary of the Chinook and Tahkaht.] Manuscript, 3 leaves, folio, written oh ond side only; in the library of the Bureau of Eth* nology. Included in an article by Mr. Knipe, entitled: Notes on the Indian tribes of the northwest coast of America. Langevin (H. L.) British Columbia. | Report of the hon. H. L. Langevin, C. B., | minister of public works. | Printed by order of parliament. | [Vignette.] | Ottawa: | printed by I. B. Taylor,29, 31 and 33, Rideau street. | 1872. Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. contents pp. iii-iv, [list of] appendices pp. v-vi. text pp. 1-55, appendices pp. 56- 246, 8°. Appendix CC. A dictionary of the Chinook Jargon, or Indian trade language of the north ■ Pacific coast. Published by T. N. Hibben and Co., Victoria, B. C. Part I. Chinook-English, pp. 161-173. Part II. English-Chinook, pp. 174- 182. Copies seen: Georgetown. Latham (Robert Gordon). Miscellaneous contributions to the ethnography of North America. By R. G. Latham, M.D. In Philological Soc. [of London], Proc. vol. 2, pp. 31-50 [London], 1846,8°. (Congress.) Contains a number of Cathlascon terms in the comparative lists of words. Reprinted in the same author's Opuseula, pp. 275-297, for title of which see below. On the languages of the Oregon territory. By R. G. Latham, M. D. Read before the Society on the 11th December, 1844. In Ethnological Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 1, pp. 154-166, Edinburgh [1848], 8°. (Congress.) A vocabulary of the Shoshonee, showing "affinities (such as they are)" with a number of American languages, among them the Chinook-and Cathlascon, pp. 159-160. This article reprinted in the same author's Opuseula, pp. 249-264, for title of which see below. ■ The | naturakhistory | of | the varieties of man. | By | Robert Gordon Latham (R. G.) —Continued. Latham, M. D., F. R. S., | late fellow of King's college, Cambridge; | one of the vice-presidents of the Ethnological society, London; | corresponding member to the Ethnological society, | New York, etc. | [Monogram in shield.] | London: | John Van Voorst, Paternoster row. 1 M. D. CCCL [1850]. Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names of printers 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii-xi, bibliography pp. xiii-xv, explanation of plates verso blank 1 1. contents pp. xix-xxviii, text pp. 1-566, index pp. 567-574, list of works by Dr. Latham verso blank 11.8°. Division F, American Mongolidae (pp.287- 460) includes a classification of a number of North American families, among them the Chiniicks, pp. 316-323. This includes a general discussion, pp. 316-321; Jargon-words of English origin (26), of French origin (22), and derived by onomatopoeia (8), pp. 321-322. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Eames. On the languages of Northern, Western, and Central America. By R. G. Latham, M. D. (Read May the 9th.) Tn Philological Soc. [of London],Trans. 1856, pp. 57-115, London [1857], 8°. (Congress.) Brief references to the Chinook and its relation to other northwest languages. This article reprinted in the same author's Opuseula, pp. 326-377, for title of which see below. Opuseula. | Essays | chiefly | philological and ethnographical | by | Robert Gordon Latham, | M. A., M. D., F. R. S., etc. | late fellow of Kings college, Cambridge, late professor of English | in University college, London, late t 1 I/', 44 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Latham(R. G.);—Continued, assistant physician | at the Middlesex hospital. | Williams & Norgate, | 14 Henrietta street, Covent garden, London | and | 20 South Frederick street, Edinburgh. | Leipzig, R. Hartmann. | 1860. Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v-vi, text pp. 1-377, addenda and corrigenda pp. 378-418, 8°. A reprint of a number of papers read before the ethnological and philological societies of London, among them the following, which include Chinookan material: On the languages of Oregon territory (pp. 249-264) contains a comparative vocabulary of the Shoshonie with other languages, among them the Chinook and Cathlascon, pp. 255-256. Miscellaneous contributions to the ethnography of North America (pp. 275-297) contains a number of Cathlascon words in the comparative lists. On the languages of northern, western, and central America (pp. 326-377) contains brief references to the Chinook and its relation to other languages. Addenda and corrigenda, 1859 (pp. 378-418) contains brief comments on the Chinook, p. 388; Chinook words, p. 389; short vocabulary (12 words) of the Chinook compared with Selish and Shoshonie, pp. 415-416. Copies seen.- Astor, Boston Public, Brinton, Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, Pilling, Watkinson. At the Squier sale a presentation copy, no. 639, brought $2.37. The Murphy copy, no. 1438, sold for $1. Elements | of | comparative philology- I By | R. G. Latham, M. A., M. D., F. R. S., &c, | late fellow of Kings College, Cambridge; and late professor of English | in University college, London. | London: | Wa lton and Maberly, | Upper Gower street, and Ivy lane, Paternoster row; | Longman, Green, "Longman, Roberts, and Green, | Paternoster row. | 1862. | The Right of Translation is Reserved. Half-title verso names of printers 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp.vii-xi, contents pp. xiii-xx, tabular view pp. xxi-xxxii, errata p. [xxxiii], text pp. 1-752, addenda pp. 753-757, indox pp. 758-774,8°. Vocabulary of 48 words, and tho numerals 1-10 in the Watlala language, pp. 402-403. Copies seen.- Astor, British Museum, Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Watkinson. Dufosse, 1887 catalogue, no. 24564, priced a copy 20 fr., and Hiersemann, no. 36 of catalogue 16,10 M. Latham (R. G.) — Continued. Robert Gordon Latham, the eldest son of the Rev. Thomas Latham, was born in the vicarage of Billingsborongh, Lincolnshire, March 24, 1812. Inl819hewasenteredatEton. Twoyears afterwards he was admitted on the foundation, and in 1829 went to Kings, where he took his fellowship and degrees. Ethnology was his first passion and his last, though for botany he had a very strong taste. He died March 9, 1888.—Theodore Watts in The Athenaeum, March 17, 1888. Leclerc (Charles). Bibliotheca | ameri- cana | Catalogue raisonne | d'une tres- precieuse | collection de livres anciens | et modernes | sur l'Amerique et les Philippines | Classes par ordre alpha- be'tique de noms d'Auteurs. | R^dige" par Ch. Leclerc. | [Design.] | Paris | Maisonneuve & Cie | 15, quai Voltaire | M. D. CCC. LXVII [1867] Cover title as above, half-title verso details of sale 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vii, catalogue pp. 1-407,8°. Includes titles of a number of works containing material relating to the Chinookan languages. Copies seen.- Congress, Eames, Pilling. At the Fischer sale, a copy, no. 919, brought 1.0*. j at the Squiersale.no. 651, $1.50. Leclerc, 1878, no. 345, prices it 4 fr. and Maisonneuve, in 1889,4 fr. The Murphy copy, no. 1452, brought $2.75. Bibliotheca | americana | Histoire, geographic, | voyages, archeblogie et linguistique | des | deux Ameriques | et | des iles Philippines | re'dige'e | Par Ch. Leclerc | [Design] | Paris | Maisonneuve et Cie, libraires- e'diteurs | 25, quai Voltaire, 25. | 1878 Cover title as above, half-title verso blank 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. avant-propos pp. i-xvii, table des divisions pp. xviii-xx, catalogue pp. 1-643, supplement pp. 645-694, index pp. 695-737, colophon verso blank 11.8°. The linguistic part of this volume occupies pp. 537-643; it is arranged under families, and contains titles of books in many American languages, among them the following: Langues amfiricaines en general, pp. 537-550; Chinook, p. 565. Copies seen: Boston Athenseum, Eames, Pilling. Priced by Quaritch, no. 12172, 12*.; another copy, no. 12173, large paper, 11. Is. Leclerc's Supplement, 1881, no. 2831, pricesitl5fr., and no. 2832, a copy on Holland paper, 30 fr. A large paper copy is priced by Quaritch, no. 30230,12*. Maisonneuve in 1889 prices it 15 fr. Lee (Daniel) and Frost (J. H.) Ten years in Oregon. | By D. Lee and J. H. Frost, | late of the Oregon mission of tmi mjumamt CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES, 45 Lee (D.) andvFrost (J. H.) —Cont'd, the Methodist episcopal church. | [Picture.] | New-York: | published for the authors: 200 Mulberry-street. | J. Collord, Printer. | 1844.' Title verso copyright notice 1 1. preface pp. 3-6, contents pp. 7-11, text pp. 13-344,12°. Specimen of an Jjidian [Cathlascon] prayer with English translation, pp. 184-185.—A number of sentences and grace before meals in the language of the Indians of the Cascades, p. 204. —Hymn (two verses) in the Cascade with English translation, p. 205 Vocabulary (50 words) of the Clatsop [Chinook Jargon], south side of the Columbia River, pp. 343-344. Copies seen.- Astor, Boston Athenaeum, British Museum, Congress, Pilling, Trumbull. A few sentences in Chinook Jargon from this work are reprinted in Allen (J.), Ten Tears in Oregon. Legends: Chinook See Boas (F.) Chinook Jargon St. Onge (L N.) [Le Jeune (Pere Jean-Marie Raphael).] Practical | Chinook [Jargon] vocabulary | comprising | all & the only usual words of that wonderful | Language arranged in a most | advantageous order for the speedily learning of | the same, after the plan of | right rev. bishop Durieu O M I. | the most experienced Missionary & Chinook | speaker in British Columbia. | St. Louis'mission | Kamloops. | 1886. Cover title verso directions for pronouncia- tion, no inside title; text pp. 1-16,16°. The vocabulary, which is Chinook Jargon, is arranged by lessons, i-xviii, without headings. They comprise: i,numerals,- ii, the firmament, seasons, and days of the week; iii, geographio features, &c.,- iv, the family and relationships; v, animals; vi, implements and utensils; vii,. nationalities; viii, nouns; ix,money; x, parts of the body; xi, wearing apparel; xii, domestic utensils; xiii, nouns; xiv, adjectives; xv,pronouns ; xvi, adverbs; xvii, verbs; xviii, scripture names and church terms. Copies seen: Eells, Pilling. A later edition with title-page as follows: Chinook [Jargon] Vocabulary. | Chinook-English. | From the Original of Rt. Rev. | Bishop Durieu, O. M. I. | With the Chinook Words in Phonography | By | J. M. R. Le Jeune O. M. I. | Second Edition. | Mimeographed at Kamloops. | October 1892. Cover title verso'' Duployan Phonetio Alphabet," no inside title, text (triple columns, I Chinook Jargon in italics alphabetically Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. arranged, Jargon in stenographic characters, and English in italics) pp. 1-16, prayer in jargon, stenographic characters, on recto of back cover, verso list of publications by Father Le Jeune. Copies seen.- Pilling. Early in October, 1892, I wrote to Bishop Durieu requesting a copy of the 1886 edition of the "Chinook Vocabulary," composed by him, and received in reply (November 1) a statement to the effect that he would be glad to oblige me, but that he had written no such book. Transcribing the title-page of the little book in question, I sent it to him asking an explanation, as his name was given thereon. The following is his response: New Westminister, B. C, Nov. 16, 1892. Dear Sir : In answer to your favor of the 11th inst., I beg to state thatwhat I wrote you in my last is but the truth. I have not written anything in tho Indian language or in the Chinook. What you have enumerated under my name, because my name is mentioned on the title of the work, must be placed under the name of Rev. Father Le Jeune as the publisher and the author. But to make sure of it, and in order that your bibliography may be correct, I will sei.d this letter to Rev. Father Le Jeune, of Kamloops, begging him to give you the name of the author of those works you have placed under my name. I have the honor to be, dear sir, Tour humble servant, Paul Durieu. This was sent me with the following explanatory letter by Father Le Jeune: Kamloops, B. C., Nov. SI, 1892. Dear Sib: Bishop Durieu gave me those lessons in Chinook, in a few flying sheets, over twelve years ago (September, 1879). Of course those sheets are lost long ago. As bis lordship does not want to appear as the author of those little pamphlets, you had better mention tbem as arranged by myself out of lessons received from his lordship. Tours, Father Le Jeune. [ ] [Two lines stenographic characters.] | No. 1. Kamloops Wawa May 2. '91 [—67. 26 Feb. 93] A periodical in tho Chinook Jargon, stenographic characters, intended as a weekly, but issued in its early stages at irregular intervals, at Kamloops, British Columbia, under the editorship of Father Le Jeune, and reproduced by him with the aid of the mimeograph. See facsimile of the first page of the initial issue. The first three numbers are in triple columns, jargon in italics, Jargon in shorthand characters, and English in italics; the fourth number is in double columns, Jargon in short- ' hand and English in italics; the subsequent issues are in shorthand with headings in Eng- i I 46 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Le Jeune (J. M. R.) —Continued. liah. All the issues are in 16° except nos. 5-6 and 7-8 (double numbers), which are in 32°. At the beginning each issue consisted of 8 pages, with continuous pagination, but occasionally the parts were separately paged. Beginning with no. 33, the first issue of vol. 2, all the numbers consist of 4 pages each. The following is a detailed list of the issues, made up from my copy, which is the only one I have seen, giving number, date of issue, and pagination: No.l May 2,'91, pp. 1-8,16°. 2 9, '91, 1-16,16°. 3 16, '91, 17-24,16°. 4 Aug. 5, '91, 25-32,16°. 5-6 Sept. '91, 1-32,32°a. [7-8 Oct. '91, 1-32], 32°a. 9 Feb. 1,'92, 1-4,16a°. 10 6,'92, 5-8,16°. 11 14, '92, 9-12,16°. 12 21, '92, 13-16,16°. 13 28, '92, 17-20,16°. 14 Mch. 6, '92, 21-24,16°. 15 13, '92, [25-29], 17-206,16°. 16 20, '927 33-34, 21-246, 39-40,16°. 17 27, '92, 41-48,16°. 18 Apr. 3,'92, 49-52, l-4c, 16°. 19 10, '92, 25-285 (57-60 lacking), 16°. 20 10, '92, 65-66, 29-326, 71-72,16°. 21 17-24, '92, 73-74, 33-366, 79-80,16°. 22 24, '92, 81-82 (83-86 lacking), 87- 88,16°. 23 May 1,'92, 89-90, 37-406, 95-96,16°. 24 8,'92, 105-112 (97-104 lacking), 16°. 25 15, '92, 113-114, 41-445, 119-120, 16°. 26 22, '92, 121-122,123-1266,127-128, 45-486,16°. 27 26, '92, 129-130,131-1346,135-136, 16°. 28 June 5, '92, 137-138,139-1426,139-142, bis 6,143-14*4,16°. 29 12, '92, 145-146,147-1506,151-152, 16°. 30 19, '92, 155-158 [sic] b, 16°. 31 26, '92, 153-154,159-160,163-1665, 16°. 32 30, '92, (167-168 lacking) 169- 1726,16°. Vol.2 33 July 3,'92, 1-4,16°. 34 10, '92, 5-8,16°. 35 17,'92, 9-12,16°. 36 24, '92, 13-16,16°. 37 31, '92, 17-20,16°. 38 Aug. 7, '92, 21-24,16°. Supplement to nos. 33-38, pp. l-24d, 16°. 39 Aug.14, '92, pp. 25-28,16°. 40 21,'92, 29-32,16°. Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. No. 41 Aug.28, '92, pp. 33-36,16°. 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 Vol.3: 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 Sept. 4, '92, 11, '92. 18, '92, 25, '92, 2, '92, 16 (sic) 16, '92, 23,'92, 30, '92, 6, '92, 13, '92, 20, '92, 27, '92, 4, '92, 11, '92,' 18, '92, 25, '92, Jan. 1 Oct. Nov. Dec. 37-40,16°. 41-44,16°. 45-48,16°. 49-52,16°. 53-56,16°. 57-60,16°. 61-64,16°. 65-68,16°. 69-72,16°. 73-76,16°. 77-80,16°. 81-84,16°. 85-88,16°. 89-92,16°. 93-96,16°. 97-100,16°. 101-104,16°. 93, 1-4,16°. 8, '93, 5-8,16°. 15, '93, 9-12,12°. 22, '93, 13-16,16°. 29, '93, 17-20,16°. Feb.' 5, '93, 21-24,16°. 12,'93, 25-28,16°. 19, '93, 29-32,16°. 26, '93, 33-36,16°. The breaks in the pagination, beginning in j no. 15, are due to the intention of the editor to! make separates of different series of articles, j one of which, entitled Sacred History, runs'] through many of the issues, beginning with no.i 9, each with its special heading, " The creation' of the world," "Adam and Eve," etc. In all ; the later numbers of vol. 1, beginning with no. Km the middle sheet (4 pages) has its own heading, name of the paper, date, etc., as on the first sheet. The Sacred History series runs as fol- \ lows, page 17 in no. 15 connecting, it will be I seen from the table below, with the sixteen 1 pages, variously numbered, appearing in the, earlier numbers: No. 9, pp. 2-4 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 6-8 10-12 16 18-20 22-24 17-20 21-24 none none 25-28 29-32 33-36 .22, lacking. 23, pp. 37-40 24, none^ 25, 41-44 26, 123-126 27, 131-134 28, 139-142 28, 139-142 6is 29, 147-150 30, 155-158 31, 163-166 32, 169-172 Referring to this list it will be seen that in no. 26 the author added four extra pages (45-48), ' afterwhich the separate pagination was discon-' tinued. In no. 28 also four extra pages (139- 142 bis) are included. a Nos. 5-6 are entitled Chinook Hymns; nos 6 Sacred history pages. cNight prayers in the Shushwap language, ((History of the old testament; for title see St. Onge (L.N.) 7-8, Elements of shorthand; for titles see below. CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 47 [M.I.. Kamloops ¥UiA/*Jl*yXll' Ou./(<m.A \pepoL. ictfta. I -Tie^n I iKowvt loops IclAo, |H '3o/i eta ii' j C~rz,/ce-_cAa.&d \p0u$ fePsp wgk mi m m mm n°s ^\>. 6 . O mm cy, s~ A /J 6U ^qs J C* wants to appear ocrtct SpeaJ(, to cctC pi/Atf toctwh to Occk/^ to 'k/lc'tcPcift! /p' t/izy le FACSIMILE OF THE FIRST PAGE. QF TH.E. KAMLOOPS WAWA. J 48 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Lfi Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. In a few numbers the article on Sacred His-. tory is omitted. Of these no. 17 contains in lieu four pages of hymns set to music; no. 18, night prayer in Shushwap; in no. 22 nothing was substituted; no. 24, list of subscribers, etc. In explanation of these irregularities Father Le Jeune, under date of July 13,1892, writes me as follows: "Concerning your remarks on missing pages and numbers, let me say: There are only 4 pages of no. 19, pp. 25-28; it was a mistake; no. 18 is Ap. 3 and no. 20, which should have been no. 19, is Ap. 10. It was too late to correct the error, so I continued counting from no. 20 upward. In the same way you will find no. 21, 'Sacred History,' § 64-70, pages 33-36, is the same date as no. 22, Ap. 24. The list of subscribers can go in no. 24 as pages 97-100, and my French letter of Ap. 1st as pages 101-104. "I am ashamed that there should be so much confusion in the pagination of the little paper; as you see, I was trying to carry out two things at the same time—first to make the regular pages with, the calendar of the week and second the four pages of Sacred History. These were not issued at the same time, but in two series, as I wished to have the Sacred History bound separately. Then I am not sitting at rest in an office, but traveling throughout my mission, over 500 miles, taking my duplicating outfit with me, with much besides to do, as, for instance, 300 confessions to hear at Kamloops at Easter, 400 last month at the Shushwap, etc. '•You will see that with July I began the second volume, and hereafter the pages, four to each number, will be numbered in succession. The Sacred History will be given monthly only—16 pages to each number. I commence again from the very beginning, having Father St. Onge's translation." Most of the matter given is of a religious character, the Sacred History series of articles being the most extensive. Beginning with no. 13, each issue contains a list of the feast and fast days for the ensuing week, and with no. 15 the gospels of the various Sundays are given. A Chinook vocabulary appears in the first three numbers, and a list of phrases in the fourth. During October, 1892,T received from Father Le Jeune copies of a reissue of nos. 1-8 of the Wawa, paged 1-40, all in 16°, and containing for the most part the material given in the originals. They are dated May, June, July, August, September, November, and December, 1892, and January, 1893, four pages each, consecutively paged. To these is added a supplemental signature, paged 33-40, headed "Success of the Duployan Shorthand among the natives of British Columbia." There have also been issued two "Supplements to the Kamloops Wawa" "Chicago World's Fair Notes," numbered 1 and 2, and dated respectively November 1 and 8,1892, each Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. containing four pages, numbered 1-8. The first contains an illustration of a H. S. coast line battle ship, the second one of the Manufactures and Liberal Arts Building. There is also a third of these extras, a single quarto page headed: " Chicago News, Supplement to the Kamloops Wawa. No. 1, Nov. 1st, 1892," at the top of which is the picture of the battle ship. My inquiries in regard to these stray issues met with the following response from Father Le Jeune: "In answer to your letter of Nov.l, 1892, pages 1-40 you mention are simply a new edition of the first eight numbers. As you see by the first numbers I sent you, I did not exactly know what my little paper was going to be. Nowthat the Indians want their papers bound, I find those first numbers exhausted. Besides, numbers 5,6,7, and 8 were never properly numbered; so I made this new edition of eight numbers to be used as heading for the volume. I endeavored to get into these eight numbers what constitutes the first text-book for Indian students, so that they can be used separately. Now the collection follows in consecutive numbers, 1,2,3, etc., to 18, no. 19 [except the sacred history supplement] being skipped by mistake; then 20-31, supplements to nos. 15-32, save no. 22, omitted also by mistake; then from no. 32 ou in regular order. I reprint some of the run-out numbers of vol. I to complete the sets sent me for binding, and redress as much as I can my former incorrectness of pagination. Concerning the pages " Success of the Duployan," etc., I have given up the idea of embodying them into something else; so they remain as they • are, a letter of information to correspondents. The " Chicago News'' supplement and any other I may hereafter produce are separate pages which I shall issue at my convenience to interest the Indians and give them some useful information, but without binding myself to issue them regularly. They are rather essays than anything else." The supplemental signature of no. 8 of the reissue of the Wawa contains so many interesting facts bearing upon Father Le Jeune's work and upon the methods used in this new departure in periodical making that I give it herewith in full. Success of the Duployan Shorthand among the natives of British Columbia. "The Duployan system of stenography made its apparition in France in 1867. The orginators are the Duploye brothers, two of whom are members of the clergy and two others eminent stenographers in Paris. Father Le Jeune became acquainted with the system in 1871, being then 16 years old, and learned in a few hours. Two or three days after he wrote to Mr. E. Duploye and by return mail received a very encouraging letter. He found the knowledge of shorthand very profitable, *« CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 49 'Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. ever since, either for taking down notes or for : correspondence. It was only in July, 1890, that I the idea first came to try the shorthand as an easy phonetio writing for the Indians of British Columbia. The first trial became a success. At the end of September, 1890, a poor Indian cripple, named Charley-Alexis Mayoos, from the Lower Nicola, saw the writing for the first time, and got the intuition of the system at first sight. Hosetto decipher a few pages of Toidian prayers in shorthand. In less than two months he learned every word of them, and he soon began to communicate his learning to his friends and relatives. "Through his endeavors some eight or ten Indians at Cold water, Nicola, B. C, became thoroughly acquainted with the writing system before April 1st, 1891. In July, 1891, the first lessons were given to the Shushwap Indians; they lasted an hour every day for four or five days. Three or four of the best j oung men went on studying what they had learned, and were delighted to find themselves able to correspond in shorthand in the early fall. During the winter months they helped to propagate the system of writing among their people. In the meantime Mayoos had come to Kamloops and was pushing the work ahead among the young people there. •'In December, 1891, the system was introduced to the North Thomson Indians; in January, 1892, to those at Douglas Lake; in February at Spuzzum and North Bend; and, last of all, in March, to those at Deadman's Creek, near Sarvina. Soon after, Indian letters came from William's Lake. In May, 1892, a few lessons were given at St. Mary's Mission to the Lower Fraser and seacoast Indians. Now the Indians teach each other and are very anxious' to learn on all sides. The most advanced understand the value of the letters and the spelling of the words; but the greatest number begin by reading the words, then learn the syllables by comparing the words together, and at last come to the letters. They learn by analysis and much quicker than by synthesis. "The 'Kamloop Wawa' was first issued in May, 1891, and in eight monthly numbers gave the rudiments of stenography and the Chinook hymns as first Chinook reader. "Withno. 9, February 1st, 1892, it has become weekly, and has ever since continued to reach every week the ever increasing number of subscribers. It is now issued at 250 copies, 4 pages, 12mo, weekly. A supplement of equal size issued whenever convenient The first volume of the Kamloops Wawa closed last June with number 32. Vol. II will terminate with no. 58, Dec. 25, 1892. Contents: 1° Elements of Stenography in Chinook and English. 2° Chinook and Latin Hymns. 3° A number of Indian news. 4° Beginning of Sacred History. 5° Weekly Calendar beginning with March 1st, ' '92. 6° Gospel for every Sunday. 7° Spmo prayers in Shushwap. 8° A few hymns in CHIN i Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. - Shushwap and Chinook. 9° A few English lessons. See nos. 33,34,35. 10° Narratives of early Church History, St. Mary Magdalen, St. James, etc. " The Kamloops Phonographer had its first number issued in June, 1892. Six numbers are now ready, illustrating: 1° How shorthand is taught to the natives. 2° Alphabet and rules of shorthand. 3° Syllables and syllabical tables. 4° 1st reading books of shorthand—16 pages monthly. The intention is, in the following numbers, to mako a study of abbreviative phonography, showing how outlines can be made according to the Duployan system. We do not pretend to teach shorth. ex professo, but only to give to those interested all the information that we can concerning our little work. [Seven numbers are issued, the last in January, 1893, none containing Chinookan material.] " Li preparation: 1° A second edition of the Chinook and English Vocabulary. 2° Almanac for 1893, of which these pages are intended to become a part. 3° A Chinook translation, by Rt. Rev. Bishop Durieu [<?.«.] from New Westminster, of Bishop Gilmour's Bible History. 200 copies of the English text have been received through tho kindness of Rev. L. N. St. Onge, Troy, N. Y. These will be interleaved with the Chinook text so as to present the illustrations of the original, and the English text opposite its Chinook version. "Some will ask: How are all these works issued? Dp to date nearly all the work, autographing and duplicating on the mimeograph, has been done by the author during the leisure hours of his missionary labors. But that course can not be carried on any longer. Hired work has to be taken in. A few Indian women are already trained to do the printing. With their cooperation 16 pages can be printed on 200 to 250 copies in a day. But that work has to he paid for; and the resources are at an end. People have first wondered at the work; some find fault with it; very little thus far has been done to help it. " Now is the time for the friends of a good cause to see if something better could not be done in favor of this little work. Voluntary donations will be accepted as a providential blessing. Subscriptions to papers are also a powerful means of support and improvement. Many say: "We do not want to study the phonography." But could they not take the papers as specimens of curiosity, etc., in their libraries 1 The first volume of the Kamloops Wawa is now bound, and would make a very interesting item in any library. Price only $1.50. Send $2:50 and have the numbers of the Kamloops Phonographer as well. Please induce your friends to contribute according to their means. By doing so, you by all means shall help to enlighten many who are still sitting in darkness and in the shadow of death." The periodical is almost entirely the work of Pere Le Jeune, but few contributions of Jar- I 50 m BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE /«s** <^s- —^-^i .— . ... i w p -' - - ,~ i | K&W hops fyci wa~, i<* Mm 1 - BH $n f > 4 .«^gjy FACSIMILE OF COVER TITLE OF LE JEUNE S JARGON HYMN BOOK. Le Jeune (J. M. R.) —Continued. gon material appearing from other hands. The only exceptions I have discovered are short articles in nos. 24,34, and 35, from the pen of Dr. T. S. Bulmer, and occasionally one from Father St. Onge. An independent issue of the Wawa appeared under date of June 1,1891, numbered 1; and two of the issues are in double numbers, 5-6, and [7-8]; these latter, 32° in size, lack the heading as given in the periodical proper and evidently were not intended originally as a part of the series. The titles of these three issues are as follows: [ ] [Two lines stenographic characters.] | No. 1. Kamloops Wawa. 1 Ju. '91 No title page,heading on cover as above; text, headed " Chinook Vocabulary," pp. 1-32, advertisement on back cover, 16°. On the front cover, following the heading are two columns of matter, one in English, italic Le Jeune (J. M. R.)—Continued. characters, headed "Chinook vocabulary," the second in Jargon, stenographic characters* The vocabulary, alphabetically arranged, triple columns, Jargon, shorthand, and English, pp, 1-21.—Chinook hymns, pp. 23-32. Copies seen.- Pilling. [ ] [Two lines stenographic characters.] | Kamloops Wawa, | September) 1891 | Nos 5 & 6. | Chinook Hymns, j [One line stenographic characters.] [Kamloops, B. C.: 1891.] Cover title verso the alphabet, no inside title; text (in stenographic characters, headings in Jargon and Latin in italics) pp. 1-32, alphabet and numerals on recto of back cover, list of publications by Father Le Jeune verso of back cover, 32°. See the facsimile of the cover title. Copies seen: Pilling. Issued also with cover title as follows-: ~> CHINOOKAN LAMQUAOl 51 Le Jeune (J. M. K.)—Continued. I ] [Two lines stenographic characters.] | Chinook Hymns. | Kamloops. B. C. | 1891 Cover title verso alphabet and numerals, no insido title; text in stenographic characters pp. 1-32, alphabet recto of back cover, list of publications by Father LoJeuno verso of back cover, 32°. Contents as under title next above; tbe verso of tho front cover in the one edition forms the recto of the back cover in the other. Copies seen: Pilling. [ ] Elements | of | short hand. | Part I-I Kamloops. 11891 Cover I itle verso the Uphabet, textpp. [1-32], alphabet and numerals recto of back cover, list of publications by Father Le Jeune verso of back cover, 32°. Inserted by Father Le Jeune as a substitute for the lacking nos. 7-8 of tho Kamloops Wawa, Oct., 1891. Contains no Chinookan material. Copies seen: Pilling. [ ] Chinook | primer. | By which | The Native of British Columbia | and any other persons | Speaking the Chinook | are taught | to read and write Chinook | in Shorthand | in the Space of a few hours. | Price: 10 Cents. | Mimeographed at | St Louis Mission. | Kamloops, B. C. | May, 1892. Cover title as above, verso advertisement, no inside title; text pp. 1-8, advertisementreoto of back cover, verso list of publications by Father Le Jeune, 16°. See p. 52 for facsimile of the cover title. Copies seen.- Puling. A comparison of the facsimiles of the title- pages of tho hymn book and primer with the printed text of the same will show a few differences of punctuation. The printed text is correct; the facsimiles are defective in that respect. A play | in Chinook. | Joseph and his Brethren. | Act I. | By J. M. R. Le Jeune O. M. I. Kamloops, B. C. | July 1"* 1892. Cover title (manuscript, in the handwriting of its author),no inside title; text (in Chinook Jargon, stenographio characters) pp. 1-20,16°. Copies seen: Pilling. Chinook | First Reading Book I including | Chinook Hymns, Syllabary I and Vocabulary. | By | J. M. R. Le Jeune 0. M. I. | Price: 10 Cents. | [Eight lines stenographio characters.] I Kamloops. | 1893 Title verso Chinook alphabet 1 1. text in stenographic-characters, with headings in English and Jargon in italics, pp. 1-[18], 16-. Le Jeune (J. M .11. I —Continued. Hymns, pp. 1-11 Exercises, pp. 12-15.— Vocabulary; pp. 16-18. Copiesseen: Pilling. See Durieu (P.) Pere Jean-Marie Raphael Le Jeunowas born at Pleybert Christ, Finistore, France, April 12, 1855, and came to British Columoia as a missionary priest in October, 1879. He made his first acquaintance with the Thompson Indiana in June, 1880, and has been among them ever since. He began at once to study their language and was able to express himself easily in that language after a few months. When he first camo he found about a dozon Indians that knew a few prayers and a little of a catechism in the Thompson language, composed mostly by Right Rev. Bishop Durieu, O. M. I., the present bishop of New Westminster. From 1880 to 1882 he traveled only between Tale and Lytton^ 57 miles, trying to make acquaintance with as many natives as he conld in that district. Since 1882 he has had to visit also tho Nicola Indians, who speak the Thompson language and the Douglas Lake Indians, who are a branch of the Okanagan family, and had occasion to become acquainted with the okan- agan language, in which he composed and revised most of the prayers they have in use up to the present. Since June 1,1891, he has also had to deal with the Shushwap Indians, and, as the language is similar to that in use by the Indians of Thompson River, he very soon became familiar with it. He tried several years ago to teach the Indians to read in the English characters, but without avail, and two years ago ho undertook to teach them in shorthand, experimenting first upon a young Indian hoy who learned the shorthand after a single lesson and began to help him teach the others. Tho work went on slowly until last winter, when they began to be interested in it all over the country, and since then they have been learning it with eagerness and teaching it to one another. Leland (Charles Godfrey). The Chinook Jargon. In St. James Gazette, vol. 17, no. 2529, p. 6, London, July 13,1888, folio. (Pilling.) General remarks concerning the language, with words, phrases, and sentences therein. [ ] An international idiom. In the Saturday Review, vol. 30, no. 1822, pp. 377-378, London, Sept. 27,1890, folio. A review of Hale (H.), An international idiom, giving a number of examples. Lenox: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the Lenox Library, New York City. [Lionnet (Pire —).] Vocabulary-1 of the | Jargon or trade language | of Oregon. 52 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE t — — m mw\ 1 IVFI75 m 1 lOtii raJEiiili. T^Nati'vtS oY 131W Cplicrvibfa,' &/v\4, u,yw w>!"ht> pev^so'ny 1 frortcul oAvd write (Ik* woo k ' i/vy ShorCVvocAvd, Pna ... 10 CemK> MivvuoarapkccL at" || Lotus MissiW Ka/wAoops, ^ G> May I FACSIMILE OF COVER TITLE OF LE JEUNE'S JARGON PRIMER. m CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 53 Lionnet (Pere —) — Continued. Colophon: Published by the Smithsonian institution, | Washington, D. C, | April, 1853. No title page, heading only; letter of Prof. Henry and report of Prof. "W. TV. Turner 1 1. text pp. 1-22,8° form on 4° page. French, English, and Jargon vocabulary, alphabetically arranged by French words, pp. 1-22. "Dr. B.Rush Mitchell, of the United States Navy, recently presented to the Smithsonian Institution a manuscriptvocabulary,inFrench and Indian, obtained in Oregon, and said to have been compiled by a French Catholic priest. It was submitted for critical examination to Prof.'W. "W. Turner, and in accordance with his suggestion the vocabulary has been ordered to be printed for distribution in Oregon."—Extract from letter of Prof. Henry. "Some years ago the Smithsonian Institution printed a small vocabular3r of the Chinook Jargon, furnished by Dr. R. B. Mitchell, of the U. S. Navy, and prepared, as I afterward learned, by Mr. Lionnet, a Catholic priest, for his own use while studying the language at Chinook Point."—Extract from the preface of Gibbs's Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. Copies seen: Georgetown, Pilling, Smithsonian. Lord's prayer: Cascade Chinook Chinook Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon See Youth's. Bergholtz (G. F.) Duflot de Mofras (E.) Bancroft (H. H.) Bolduc (J. B.Z.) Bulmer (T.S.) Chinook. Dictionary. Eells (M.) Everette (W. E.) Gibbs (G.) Gill (J. K.) Good (J. B.) Hale (H.) Marietti (P.) Nicoll (E.F.) Lo wdermilk: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the bookstore' of "W. H. Lowder- milk & Co., "Washington, D. C. Ludewig (Hermann Ernst). The | literature | of | American aboriginal languages. | By | Hermann E. Ludewig. [ "With additions and corrections | by professor Wm. W. Turner. | Edited by Nicolas Trubner. | London: | Trubner and co., 60, Paternoster row. | MDCCCLVIII [1858]. Half-title "Triibner's bibliotheca glottica I" verso blank 11. title as above verso printer 11. preface pp. v-viii, contents verso blank 1 1.. Ludewig (H. E.) — Continued. editor's advertisement pp. ix-xii, biographical memoir pp. xiii-xiv, introductory bibliographical notices pp. xv-xxiv, text pp. 1-209, addenda pp. 210-246, index pp. 247-256, errata pp. 257-258, 8°. Arranged alphabetically by languages. Addenda by "Wm. W. Turner and Nicholas Trubner, pp. 210-246. Contains a list of grammars and vocabularies of the languages of the American peoples, among them the following: American languages generally, pp. xv-xxiv; Chinuk and Chinuk jargon, pp. 40-41,47. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, Georgetown, Pilling. At the Fischer sale, no. 990, a copy brought 5s. 6d.; at the Field sale, no. 1403, $2.63; at the Squiersale, no. 699, $2.62; another copy, no. 1906, $2.38. Priced by Leclerc, 1878, no. 2075, 15 fr. The Pinart copy, no. 565, sold for 25 fr., and the Murphy copy, no. 1540, for $2.50. "Dr. Ludewig has himself so fully detailed . the plan and purport of this work that little more remains for me to add beyond the mere statement of the origin of my connection with the publication and the mention of such additions for which I am alone responsible, and which, during its progress through the press, have gradually accumulated to about one-sixth of the whole. This is but an act of justice to the memory of Dr. Ludewig, because at the time of his death, in December, 1856, no more than 172 pages were printed off, and these constitute the only portion of the work which had the benefit of his valuable personal and final revision. " Similarity of pursuits led, during my stay in New York in 1855, to an intimacy with Dr. Ludewig, during which he mentioned that he, like myself, had been making bibliographical memoranda for years of all books which serve to illustrate the history of spoken, language. As a first section of a more extended work on the literary history of language generally, he had prepared a bibliographical memoir of the remains of aboriginal languages of America. The manuscript had been deposited by him in the library of the Ethnological Society at New York, but at my request he at once most kindly placed it at my disposal, stipulating only that it should be printed in Europe, under my personal superintendence. " Upon my return to England, I lost no time in carrying out the trust thus confided to me, intending then to confine myself simply to pro- ducingacorrectcopyofmyfriend'smanuscript. But it soon became obvious that the transcript had been hastily made, and but for the valuable assistance of literary friends, both in this country and in America, the work would probably have been abandoned. My thanks aremore particularly due to Mr. E. G. Squier, and to Prof. "William "W. Turner, of Washington, by whose considerate and valuable cooperation many difficulties were cleared away and my edi- toriallabors greatly lightened. This encouraged me to spare neither personal labor nor expense -A 54 BIBLIOGRAPHY OP THE Ludewig (H. E.) — Continued. in the attempt to render the work as perfect as possible, with what success must be left to the judgment of those who can fairly appreciate the labors of a pioneer in any new field of literary research."—Editor's advertisement. "Dr. Ludewig, though but little known in this country [England], was held in considerable esteem as a jurist, bothin Germany and the United States of America. Born at Dresden in 1809, with but little exception he continued to reside in his native city until 1844, when he emigrated to America; but, though in both countries he practiced law as a profession, his bent was the study of literary history, which was evidenced by his 'Livre des Ana, Essai-de Catalogue Manuel,' published at his own cost in 1837, and by his 'Bibliothekonomie,' which appeared a few years later. "But even while thus engaged he delighted in investigating the rise and progress of the land of his subsequent adoption, and his researches into the vexed question of the origin of the peopling of America gained him the highest consideration, on both sides of the Atlantic, as a man of original and inquiring mind. He was a contributor to Naumann's 'Serapajum;' and among the chief of his contributions to that journal may be mentioned those on ' American Libraries,' on the 'Aids to American Bibliography,' and on the 'Book Trade of the United States of America.' In 1846 appeared his ' Literature of American Local History,' a work of much importance and which required no small amount of labor and perseverance, owing to the necessity of consulting the many and widely scattered materials, which had to be sought out from apparently the most unlikely channels. "These studies formed a natural introduction to the present work on ' The Literature of American Aboriginal Languages,' which occupied his leisure concurrently with the others, and the printing of which was commenced in Ludewig (H. E.)—Continued. August, 1856, but which he did not live to see launched upon the world t for at the date of his death, on the 12th of December following, only 172 pages were in type. It had been a labor of love with him for years j and, if ever author Were mindful of the nonum prematur in annum, he was when he deposited his manuscript in the library of the American Ethnological Society, diffident himself as to its merits and value on A subject of such paramount interest. He had satisfied himself that in due time the reward of his patient industry might be the production of some more extended national work on the subject, and with this he was contented; for it was a distinguishing feature in his character, notwithstanding his great and varied knowledge and brilliant acquirements, to disregard his own toil, even amounting to drudgery if needful, if he could in any way assist the promulgation of literature and science. '' Dr. Ludewig was a corresponding member of many of the most distinguished European and American literary societies, and few men were held in greater consideration by scholars bothin AmericaandGermany, as will readily be acknowledged should his voluminous correspondence ever see the light. In private life he was distinguished by the best qualities which endear a man's memory to those who survive him: he was a kind and affectionate husband and a sincere friend. Always accessible and ever ready to aid and counsel those who applied to him for advice upon matters pertaining to literature, his loss will long be felt by a most extended circle of friends, and in him Germany mourns one of the best representatives of her learned men in America, a genuine type of a class in whioh, with singular felicity, to genius of the highest order is combined a painstaking and plodding perseverance but seldom met with beyond theconfines of the' Fatherland.'"—Biographic memoir. M. Macdonald (Duncan George Forbes). British Columbia | and | Vancouver's island | comprising | a description of these dependencies: their physical | character, climate, capabilities, population, trade, natural history, | geology, ethnology, gold-fields, and future prospects | also | An Account of the Manners and Customs of the Native Indians by | Duncan George Forbes Macdonald, C. E. | (Late of the Government Survey Staff of British Columbia, and of the International Boundary | Line of North America) Author of 'What the Farmers may do with the | Macdonald (D. G. F.) — Continued. Land' 'The Paris Exhibition' 'Decimal Coinage' &c. | With a comprehensive map. | London | Longman, Green, Longman, Roberts, & Green | 1862. Half-title verso name of printer 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface p p. v-vii, contents pp. ix-xiii, text pp. 1-442, appendices pp. 443-524, map, 8°. Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon and English equivalent terms (375words and 10 phrases and sentences), pp. 394-398. Copies seen: British Museum, Congress. Sabin's Dictionary, no. 43149, mentions: Second edition, London, Longmans, 1863,8°. ^^jj CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 55 ^Macfie (Matthew). "Vancouver Island and | British Columbia. | Their history, resources, and prospects. [ By | Matthew Macfie, F. R. G. Si | Five years resident in Victoria, V. I. | London: | Longman, Green> Longman, Roberts, & Green. | 1865. Half-title verso name of printer 1 1. frontis- pieoe 1 1. title verso blank 11. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. ix-xii, contents pp. xii- xxi, list of illustrations verso blank 11. text pp. 1-518, appendix pp. 519-558,indexpp. 559-574. 8°. A few sentences in the Chinook Jargon, pp. 472-473. Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Athenseum, British Museum, Cqpgress, Geological Survey, Pilling. Macleod (Rev. Xavier Donald). History of the devotion | to the | blessed virgin Mary | in | North America. | By | the rev. Xavier Donald Macleod, [professor [&c. two lines.] | With a memoir of the author, | by | the most rev. John B. Purcell, D. D., | archbishop of Cincinnati. | New York: | Virtue & Yorston, 112 Dey street. [Copyright 1866.] Frontispiece, title verso copyrighfrnotice 11. publishers' notice pp. iii-iv, inscription to the memory of the author verso blank 11. contents pp. 5-7, verso blank, memoir by Purcell pp. ix-xxiii verso blank, engraving, text pp. 1-461 verso blank, index pp. 463-467,8°. Hymn to the Blessed Mary, in the Chinook Jargon, p. 255. Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, Georgetown. '-* ■ ■ History | of | Roman Catholicism | in | North America. ) By | the rev. Xavier Donald MacLeod, | professor [<fcc. one line.] | With a memoir of the author, | by | the most rev. John B. Purcell, D. D., | archbishop of Cincinnati. | New York: | Virtue & Yorston, | 12 Dey street. [186-?] Portrait 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. publishers' notice pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v-vii, dedication verso blank 1 1. memoir pp. ix-xxiii, text pp. 1-461, index pp. 463-467,8°. Linguistic contents as under title next above, p.255. Copies seen .- Boston Athenseum. Xavier Donald McLeod, author, born in New York city, November 17,1821; died near Cincinnati, Ohio, July 20,1865; studied at Columbus, and surprised his family and friends by taking orders in the Protestant Episcopal church in 1845. After spending a few years in a country parish, he went in 1850" to Europe, where he Macleod (X. D.) — Continued. traveled and studied until 1852. The result of his European visit was his conversion to the Roman Catholic faith. In 1857 he became editorially connected with the St. Louis'' Leader." Subsequently he was ordained a priest, and appointed professor of rhetoric and belles- lettres at Mount St. Mary's college, Ohio. He met his death in a railroad accident.—Apple- ton's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. Maisonneuve: This word following a title or included within parentheses after a note Vndi- cates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in tbe bookstore of Maisonneuve et Cie^ Paris, France. Mallet: This word following a title or inclosed within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of Major Edmond Mallet, "Washington, D. C. Marietti (Pietro), editor. Oratio Dominica | in ccl. lingvas versa | et | cxxxx. charactervm formis | vel nostratibvs vel peregrinis expressa | cyrante | Petro Marietta | Eqyite Typographo Pontificio | Socio Administro | Typographei | S. Consilii de Propaganda Fide | [Printer's device] | Romae | AnnoM. DCCC. LXX [1870]. Half-title 1 1. title 1 1. dedication 3 ll.pp.xi- xxvii, 1-319, indexes 411.4°. Includes 59 versions of the Lord's prayer in various American dialects, among them the Oregonice, p. 303. Copies seen: Trumbull. Massachusetts Historical Society: These words following a title or within parentheses after a note indicate that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of that society, Boston, Mass. Missionary's Companion. See Demers (M.) et al. Montgomerie (Lieut. JohnEglinton) and De Horsey (A. F. R.) A | few words | collected from the 1 languages | spoken by the Indians | in the neighbourhood of the | Columbia River & Puget's Sound. | By John E. Montgomerie, Lieutenant R. N. | and Algernon F. R. De Horsey, Lieutenant, R. R. | London: | printed by George Odell, 18 Princess-street, Cavendish-square. | 1848. Title verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. iii-iv, text pp. 5-30*, 12°. Vocabulary of the Chinook, Clikitat, Cascade and Squally languages, pp. 1-23.—Numerals in Chinook Jargon, p. 23.—Numerals in 56 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Montgomerie (J. E.) — Continued. Squally, p. 24—Chinook proper and Chehalis numbers, p. 24.—Names of places, pp. 25-28 Corruptions used in the trading language, pp. 28-30. Copies seen: British Museum, Sir Thomas Phillips, Cheltenham, England. Miiller (Friedrich). Grundriss | der | Sprachwissenschaft | von | Dr. Fried- rich Miiller | Professor[&c. three lines.] | I. Band | I. Abtheilung. | Einleitung in die Sprachwissenschaft[-IV. Band. 11. Abtheilung. |Nachtrage zum Grundriss aus den Jahren | 1877-1887]. | Wien 1876 [-1888]. | Alfred Holder | K. K. Universitats-Buchhandler. | Roth- enthurmstrasse 15. 4 vols. (vol. 1 in 2 parts, vol. 2 originally in 4 divisions, vol. 3 originally in 4 divisions, vol. 4 Miiller (F.) — Continued. part 1 all published), each part and division with an ontside title and two inside titles, 8° Vol. 2, part 1, which includes the American languages, was originally issued in two divisions, each with the following special title: DieSprachen | der | schlichthaarigenRassen | von | Dr. Friedrich Miiller | Professor [&c. eightlines.] | I. Abtheilung. | Die Sprachen der australischen, der hyperboreischen | und der amerikanischen Rasse [sic], j "Wien 1879[-1882]. | Alfred Holder | S. K. Hof-und Universitats-Buchhandler | Rothen- thurmstrasse 15. Die Sprache der Tshinuk, vol. 2, part 1, division 2 (pp. 254-256) includes: Die Laute, p. 254.—Das Nomen, p. 254.—Das Pronomen, p. 255.—Das Verbum, pp. 255-256.—Die Zahlen- ausdriicke, p. 256. Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 'Watkinson. 1ST. 61 National Museum: These words following a title or within parentheses after a note indicate that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of that institution, Washington, D. C. New. The New Testament in Chinook. In the New York Times, Oct. 12, 1890. (Eames.) A short extract from a sermon in the Chinook Jargon, with literal English translation. Copied from The Academy. (*) New edition. Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. See Dictionary. Nicoll (Edward Holland). The Chinook language or Jargon. In Popular Science Monthly, vol. 35, pp. 257- 261, New York, 1889,8°. (Bureau of Ethnology, Pilling.) A conversation in Chinook Jargon, with English translation, p. 257. — Origin of the Chinook Jargon, showing many words derived from the English, French, Chinook, Chehalis, etc., onomatopoeia, prefixes, etc., pp. 257-259.— Numerals 1-11, 20, 100, p. 260.—Lord's prayer, with interlinear English translation, p. 260. Nihaloth: Vocabulary See Hale (H.) Norris (Philetus W.) The | calumet of the Coteau, |and other | poetical legends of the border. [Also, | a glossary of Indian names, words, and | western provincialisms. | Together with | a guide-book | of the | Yellowstone national park. | By P. W. Norris, | five years superin- Norris (P. W.) — Continued, tendent of the Yellowstone national park. | All rights reserved. | Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott &• co. | 1883. Frontispiece 11. title verso copyright notice 11. dedication verso blank 11. poem verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. 9-12, contents pp. 13-14, illustrations verso blank 1 1. text pp. 17-170, notes pp. 171-221, glossary pp. 223-233, guide book pp. 235-275, map, sm. 8°. Glossary of Indian words and provincialisms, pp. 223-233, contains a number of Chinook Jargon words. Oopiesseen: National Museum, Pilling, Powell. Numerals: Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon See Boas (F.) Duflot de Mofras (E.) Eells (M.) Haldeman (S. S.) Ross (A.) Cox(R.) Dictionary. Gill (J. K.) Good (J. B.) Haines (E.M.) Hale(H.) Hazlitt (W. C.) Montgomerie (J. E.) Nicoll (E. F.) Palmer (J.) Parker (S.) Richardson (A. D.) Stuart (G.) Swan (J. G.) Tate (CM.) CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 57 P. Palmer (Joel). Journal of travels | over the | Rocky mountains, | to the | month of the Columbia river; | made during the years 1845 and 1846: | containing minute descriptions of the j valleys of the Willamette, Umpqua, and Clamet; | a general description of | Oregon territory; | its inhabitants, climate, soil, [productions, etc., etc.; | a list of | necessary outfits for emigrants; | and a | Table of Distances from Camp to Camp on the Route. | Also; | A Letter from the Rev. H. H. Spalding, resident Missionary, for the last ten years, | among the Nez Perce" Tribe of Indians, on the Koos-koos-keo River; The | Organic Laws of Oregon Territory; Tables of about 300 words of the Chinook | Jargon, and about 200 Words of the Nez Perce" Language; a Description of | Mount Hood; Incidents of Travel, &c, &c. | By Joel Palmer. | Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, Walnut street, | between Fourth and Fifth. | 1847. Cover title.- Journal of travels | over the | Rocky mountains, | to the | mouth of the Columbia river; | made during the years 1845 and 1846. | By Joel Palmer. | Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, Walnut . street, | between Fourth and Fifth. 11847. Cover title, title verso copyright notice etc. 1 1. publishers' statement pp. iii-iv, text pp. 9-189, errata slip, 12°. "Words (200) used in tho Chinook Jargon, alphabetically arranged by Jargon words, pp. 147-151.—Chinook mode of computing numbers (1-500), p. 152. Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, Harvard. Journal of travels | over the | Rocky mountains, | to the | mouth of the Columbia river ;| made during the years 1845 and 1846: | containing minute descriptions of the | valleys of the Willamette, Umpqua, and Clamet; | a general description of | Oregon terri- : tory; | its inhabitants, climate, soil, productions, etc., etc.; | a list of | necessary outfits for emigrants; | and a | Table of Distances from Camp to Camp on the Route. | Also; [ A Letter from the Rev. H. H. Spalding, resident Missionary, for the last ten years,— Palmer (J.) —Continued, among the Nez Perc<5 Tribe of Indians, on the Koos-koos-kee River; The | Organic Laws .of Oregon Territory; Tables of about 300 words of the Chinook | Jargon, and about 200 Words of the Nez Perce" Language; a Description of | Mount Hood; Incidents of Travel, &c, &c. | By Joel Palmer. | Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, Walnut street, | between Fourth and Fifth. | 1850. Title verso copyright notice etc. 11. publishers' statement pp. iii-iv, text pp. 9-189,12°. Linguistic contents as under title next above. Copies seen: British Museum. Journal of travels | over the | Rocky mountains, | to the | mouth of the Columbia river ;| made during the years 1845 and 1846: | containing minute descriptions of the | valleys of the Willamette, Umpqua, and Clamet; | a general description of | Oregon territory; | its inhabitants, climate, soil, productions, etc., etc.; | a list of | necessary outfits for emigrants; | and a | Table of Distances from Camp to Camp on the Route. | Also; | A Letter from the Rev. H. H. Spalding, resident Missionary, for the last ten years, | among the Nez Perce' Tribe of Indians, on the Koos-koos-kee River; The | Organic Laws of Oregon Territory; Tables of about 300 words of the Chinook | Jargon, and about 200 Words of the Nez Perce" Language; a Description of | Mount Hood; Incidents of Travel, &c, &c. | By Joel Palmer. | Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, Walnut street, | between Fourth and Fifth. | 1851. Title verso copyright notice etc. 1 1. dedication verso blank 11. publishers' advertisement pp. v-vi, index [contents] pp. 7-viii [fie], text pp. 9-189,12°. Linguistic contents as under titles above. Copies seen : Boston Athenseum. Journal of travels | over the-1 Rocky mountains, | to the | mouth of the Columbia river; [made during the years 1845 and 1846: | containing minute descriptions of the | valleys of the Willamette, Umpqua, and Clamet; | a Dg^^is.^:; ^.. 58 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Palmer (J.)—Continued, general description of | Oregon territory; | its inhabitants, climate, soil, productions, etc., etc.; | a list of | necessary outfits for emigrants; | and a | Table of Distances from Camp to Camp on the Route. | Also; | A Letter from the Rev. H. H. Spalding, resident Missionary, for the last ten years, | among the Nez Perce" Tribe of Indians, on the Koos-koos-kee River; The | Organic Laws of Oregon Territory; Tables of about 300 words of the Chinook | Jargon, and about 200 Words of the Nez Perce" Language; a Description of | Mount Hood; Incidents of Travel, &c, &c. | By Joel Palmer. | Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, Walnut street, | between Fourth and Fifth. | 1852. Title verso copyright notice etc. 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 *1. publishers' advertisement pp. v-vi, index [contents] pp. 7-viii [sic], text pp. 9-189,12°. Linguistic contents as under titles above. Copies seen: Congress. Parker (Rev. Samuel). Journal | of an | exploring tour | beyond the Rocky mountains, | under the direction of the | A. B. C. F. M. | Performed in the years | 1835, '36, and '37; | containing | a description of the geography, geology, climate, and | productions; and the number, manners, and | customs of the natives. | With a | map of Oregon territory. | By Rev. Samuel Parker, A. M. | Ithaca, N. Y. | Published by the author. | Mack, Andrus, & Woodruff, Printers. | 1838. \ Title verso copyright notice 1 1. preface pp. iii-vi, contents pp. vii-xii, text pp. 13-371, map and plates, 12°. Vocabulary (90 words) of the Chinook [Jargon] language as spoken about Fort Vancouver, pp. 336-338.—Numerals 1-30,20,40,100, p. 338. Copies seen: Boston Athenseum, Boston Public, British Museum, Congress, Eames, Mallet, Trumbull. Journal | of an | exploring tour | beyond the Rocky mountains, | under the direction of the] American board of commissions [sic] for foreign missions, | in the years 1835, '36, and '37; | containing | a description of the geography, geology, climate, productions [ of the country, and the number, manners, and j customs of the natives: | Parker (S.) — Continued, with a | map of Oregon territory. | By rev. Samuel Parker, A. M. | Second edition. | Ithaca, N. Y. | Published by the author. | Mack, Andrus, & Woodruff, printers. | 1840. Title verso copyright notice 11. recommendations pp. iii-iv, preface pp. v-viii, preface to the second edition pp. ix-x, contents pp. xi-xvi, text pp. 17-384, appendix pp. 385-399, addenda pp. 399-400, map and plate, 12°. Linguistic contents as under title next above, pp. 396-398. Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Geological The edition: Edinburgh, 1841, 8°, does not contain the Chinook Jargon material. (Congress.) Journal | of an | exploring tour | beyond the Rocky mountains, | under the direction of the | A. B. C. F. M. | in the years 1835, '36, and'37; | containing | a description of the geography, geology, climate, produc- | tions of the country, and the numbers, manners, | and customs of the natives: | with a | map of Oregon territory. | By rev. Samuel Parker, A.M. | Third edition. | Ithaca, N. Y. | Mack, Andrus, & Woodruff. | Boston: Crocker & Brewster.—New-York: Dayton & Saxton; | Collins, Keese, & co.—Philadelphia: Grigg & Elliot. | London: Wiley & Putnam. | 1842. Title verso copyright notice (1838) and names of printers 1 1. recommendations pp. iii-iv, preface pp. v-viii, preface to the second and third editions pp. ix-x, contents pp. xi-xvi, text pp. 17-394, appendix pp. 395-408, map and plate, 12°. Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 405-408. Copies seen.- Bancroft, Boston Athenaaum, Eames, Geological Survey, Mallet. Journal | of an | exploring tour | beyond the Rocky mountains, | under the direction of the | A. B. C. F. M. | containing | a description of the geography, geology, climate, pro- | ductions of the country, and the numbers, man- | ners, and customs of the natives: | with a | map of Oregon territory. | By rev. Samuel Parker, A. M. | Fourth edition. | Ithaca, N. Y. | Andrus, Woodruff, & Gauntlett. | Boston: Crocker & Brewster.—New York: Huntington & Savage; | Robinson, Pratt, & Co.—Phila- r~ CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 59 Parker (S.)—Continued. I delphia: Thomas, Cowpor- | thwait & B Co.—London: Wiley & Putnam. | 1841. Pp. i-xvi, 17-416, map, 12°. Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 413-110. Copies set n : Ono in the library of W. "W. Beach, Yonkers, N. V. E— Journal | of an | exploring tour | K beyond the Rocky mountains, | under I the direction of the A. 1 i. ('. F. M. | con- taining] a description of the geography, ; geology, climate, I prodnotions of the I country, and the numbers, | manners, I and customs of the natives: | with a | | map of Oregon territory. | By rev. Sani- ! uel Parker, A. M. | Fifth edition. | Anburn: | J. C. Derby & co.; | New- York : Mark H. Newman & co.,—Gen- i pv.i: G. H. Derby & co. | Cincinnati: Derby, Bradley & co. | 1846. Title verso copyright notice etc 11. recommendations pp. iii-iv, preface pp. v-vii, preface to tho fifth edition p. ix. contents pp. xi-xvi, text pp. 17-422, map and plate, 12°. Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp.419-421. Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Georgetown, Harvard. Samuel Parker, clergyman, born in Ashfield, N. II.. April 23. 1779; died in Ithaca, N. Y., March 24.1866. He was graduated at Williams in 1806 and at Andover Theological Seminary in 1810, became a missionary in western New York, and subsequently was in charge of Congregational churches in Massachusetts and New York. Mr. Parker originated the mission of t lie American board in Oregon, traveled there in 1835-1837, subsequently lectured in many eastern States on the characterof that territory, and did much to establish the claims of the United States Government to the lands, and to induce emigrants to settle there. He is also said to have been the first to suggest the possibility of constructing a railroad through the Rocky mountains to the Pacific ocean.—Apple- ten's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. Periodical: Chinook Jargon See Le Jeune (J. IT. It.) Pilling: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that aoopy of the work referred to is in the possession of the compiler of this catalogue. Pilling (James Constantine). Smithsonian institution—Bnrean of ethnology I J. W. Powell director | Proof-sheets I of a | bibliography | of | the languages | of the | North American Indiana | by j James Constantine Pilling | (Distributed only to collaborators) I Pilling (J. C.) — Continued. Washington | Government printing office | 1885 Title verso blank 1 1. notice signed J. \v. Powell p. iii, preface pp.v-viii, introduction pp. ix-x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of libraries referred to by initials pp. xxxvit- xxxviii, list of fac-similes pp. xxxix-xl, text pp. 1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090, index of languages and dialects pp. 1091-1135, plates, 4°. Arranged alphabetically by name of author, translator, or first word of title. One hundred and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side of the sheet only. Pin art (Alphonse L.) fLinguistio material relating to the Chinookan family.] C) Manuscripts in possession of their author, who, some years ago, in response to my request for a list of his linguistic material,|wrote me as follows: 111 have colleoted, during my fifteen years of traveling vocabularies, texts, songs, general linguistic material, etc., in the following languages and dialects . . . and some relating to the Chinook. It is impossible at present to give you the number of pages, otc., as most of it is contained in my note-books, and has not as yet been put into shape. Platzmann (Julius). Verzeiohniss | einer Auswahl | amerikanischer | Gramma- Iikm, | Worterbtlcher, Katechismen | u. s. w. I Ge8ammelt | von | Julius Platzmann. | Leipzig, 1876. | K. F. Kohler's anti- quarium, | Poststrasse 17. Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. quotation fromBouqnetto verso blank 11. text, alphabetically arranged by family names, pp. 1-38,8°. List of works in Chinuk, p. 10. Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling, Trumbull, Wellesley. Pott (August Friedrich). Doppelung | (Reduplikation, Gemination) | als | eines der wichtigsten Bildnngsmittel der Sprache, | beleuchtet | aus Sprachen alter Welttheile | durch j Aug. Friedr. Pott, Dr. | Prof, der Allgemeinen Sprachwiss. an der Univ. zu Halle [Ac. two lines.] | Lemgo & Detmold, | im Verlage der M i • yor'sc In ■ 11 Hofbuchhandlnng 1862. Cover titlo as above, title as above verso quo- tation 1 l.Yorwortpp.iii-iv, Inhaltsverzoichniss pp. v-vi. text pp. 1-304, list of books on verso of hack cover, 8°. Reduplicate words in Chinook, p. 114; in Lower Chinook, pp. 37,41, GO, Gl, 02,90. Copies seen.- Astor, British Museum, Earnest 60 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Pott (A. F.)— Continued. Einleitung in die allgemeine Sprach- wissenchaft. In Internationale Zeitschrift f lir allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft, vol. 1, pp. 1-68,329-354, vol. 2, pp. 54-115, 209-251, vol. 3, pp. 110-126, 249-275, Supp. pp. 1-193, Vol. 4, pp. 67-96, vol. 5, pp. 3- 18, Leipzig, 1884-1887, and Heilbronn, 1889, large 8°. The literature of American linguistics, vol. 4, pp. 67-96. This portion was published after Mr. Pott's death, which occurred July 5,1887. The general editor of the Zeitschrift, Mr. Techmer, states in a note that Pott's paper is continued from the manuscripts which ho left.and that it is to close with the languages of Australia. In the section of American linguistics publications in all the more important stocks of North America are mentioned, with brief characterization. Powell: This word following a title or within parentheses after-anote indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of Major J. "W. Powell, Washington, JJ. O. Powell (Maj. John Wesley). Indian linguistic families of America north of Mexico. By J. W. Powell. In Bureau of Ethnology, seventh annual report, pp. 1-142, "Washington, 1891, royal 8°. Chinookan family, with a list of synonyms and principal tribes, derivation of the name, labitat, etc., pp. 63-65. Issued separately with title-page as follows: — Indian linguistic families of America | north of Mexico | by | J. W. Powell Extract from the seventh anuual report of the Bureau of ethnology | [Design] | Washington | Government printing office | 1891 Cover title as above, no inside title, half-title p. 1, contents pp. 3-6, text pp. 7-142, map, royal Linguistic contents as under title next above. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Pilling, Powell. Practical Chinook [Jargon] vocabulary. See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) Prayers: Cathlascon See Lee (D.) and Erost (J. H.) Chinook Blanchet (P. N.) Chinook Jargon Bulmer (T. S.) Chinook Jargon Demers (M.) et al. Priest (Josiah). American antiquities, | and | discoveries in the west: | being | an exhibition of the evidence | that an ancientpopulationof partially civilized nations,| differing entirely from those of Priest (J.) —Continued, tho present In-1 dians, peopled America! many centuries before | its discovery by! Columbus. | And | inquiries into theia origin, | with a | copious description | Of many of their stupendous Works! now in ruins. | With | Conjectures oa what may have | become of them. | Coma piled | from travels, authentic sources! and the researches | of | Aiitifjuariai|j Societies. | By Josiah Priest. | Albany: | printed by Hoffman and! White, No. 71, State-Street. | 1833. Polded frontispiece, title verso copyriglifl notice 11. preface pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v-viii,l text pp. 9-400, map and plates, 8°. Rafinesque (C. S.), Languages of Oregon—] Chopunish and Chinuc, pp. 395-397. Copies seen: Harvard. American antiquities, | and | dis9 coveries in the west: | being | an exhi-j bition of the evidence [that au ancient j population of partially civilized na-; tions, | differing entirely from those of the present In-1 dians, peopled America, many centuries before [ its discovery by Columbus. | And | inquiries into their origin, | with a | copious description | Of many of their stupendous Works, now in ruins. | With | conjectures concerning what may have | become of them. | Compiled | from travels, authentic sources, .and the researches | of | Antiquarian Societies. | By Josiah Priest. | Third Edition Revised. | Albany: | printed by Hoffman and White, | No. 71, State-Street. | 1833. Eolded frontispiece, title verso copyright notice 11. preface pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v-viii, text pp. 9-400, map and plate, 8°. Rafinesque (C. S.), Tabular view of the American generic languages, pp. 309-312. Languages of Oregon—Chopunish and Chinuc, pp. 395-397. Copies seen: Boston Public, Congress, Eames, Harvard, Massachusetts Historical Society. The Brinley copy, no. 5435, sold for $1.50. These articles are omitted in the later editions of Priest's work. Primer: Chinook Jargon Proper names: Chinook Chinook Clakama See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) See Catlin (G.) Stanley (J.M.) Stanley (J. M.) [Prosch (Thomas W.)] The complete | Chinook Jargou | or | Indian trade CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 61 Prosch (T. W.) —Continued. ■ ■language [ of | Oregon, Washington, g British Co- | lumbia, Alaska, Idaho | 8; And other ports'of tho North Pacific | ts Coast. | The best yet issued. | G. Davies & co., | publishers. | 709 l-Front street, Seattle, | 1888. Cover title: Dictionary | of the | Chinook, | the 8 | Indian tradelanguage | of | Oregon, Washing- 1? ton, Idaho, [ British Columbia and | Alaska. | Chinook-English and English-Chinook. | Prosch (T. W.) — Continued. 1888. I G. Davies & co., | publishers, | Seattle, W. T. | Copyright 1888 by G. Davies. Cover title, title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. 3-5, text pp. 7-40,18°. Chinook-English, alphabetically arranged, pp. 7-26.-T-English-Chinook, double columns, alphabetically arranged, pp. 27-38.—Conversation in Chinook, free translation, pp. 39-40.— Lord's prayer with interlinear English translation, p. 40. Copies seen: Pilling. Q. Quaritch: This word following a title or within B parentheses after a note indicates that a copy I of tho work referred to has been seen by the E compiler in the bookstore of Bernard Quaritch, London, Eng. Quaritch (Bernard). Catalogue | of j books on the | history, geography, | I and of [ the philology | of | America, I Australasia, Asia, Africa. | I. Historical geography, voyages, and | travels. | II. [ History, ethnology, and philology | of f America. | III. History, topography, : and ethnology | of Asia, Polynesia, and [ Africa. | Offered for Cash at the affixed I net prices by | Bernard Quaritch. | London: | 15 Piccadilly, June 1885 to October 1886. | 1886. Title verso contents 1 1. catalogue pp. 2747- I 3162, index pp. i-lxii, 8°. Lettered on tho back: QtTARITCH'S | GENERAL | CATALOGUE | PART XII. ' | VOYAGES | AND | TRAVELS [ AMERICANA | AND | ORIENTALIA | LONDON 1886. This volume comprises nos. 362-364 (June, July, and August, 1885) of the paper-covered series, with the addition of a special title and a general index. American languages, pp. 3021-3042, contains two titles of books under the heading Chinook, p. 3026. The complete "General Catalogue," of which ■ the above is a portion, comprises 15 parts, each bound in red cloth, paged consecutively 1-4066, I and a sixteenth part containing a general index I of 427 pages in treble columns. Each volume < has its own special title and index, with the Quaritch (B.)—Continued. title of the series and the number of the part lettered on the back. Excepting the index, it was originally issued as nos. 332-375 of the paper-covered series, from November, 1880, to August, 1887, at which date the publication was discontinued. The index is dated 1892. Copies seen: Eames. A large-paper edition with title as follows: A general | eatal ogue of books | offered to tho public at the affixed prices | by | Bernard Quaritch [ Vol. I[-VII] | London: 115 Piccadilly, 11887 [-1892]. 7 vols, royal 8°. American languages, as under the preceding title, vol. 5, pp. 3021-3042. Copies seen: Lenox. This edition was published at 152. for the set, including the seventh or index volume. No. 86. London, December, 1887. | A rough list | of | valuable and rare books, | comprising | the choicest portions of Various Libraries, | and many very cheap works of every class of Literature, | at greatly reduced prices, | offered by | Bernard Quaritch, 15, Piccadilly, W. Cover title: "The miscellaneous and the musical library of Mr. WilliamChappell,"etc, catalogue with heading as above, pp. 1-128,8°. American languages, pp. 1-13, contains titles of a few works giving information relating to tho Chinook Jargon, j». 7. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 7 '!if ATI 62 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE K Rafinesque (Constantine Samuel). Atlantic journal, | and | friend of knowledge. | In eight numbers. | Containing about 160 original articles and tracts on Natural and | Historical Sciences, the Description of about 150 New Plants, | and 100 New Animals or Fossils. Many Vocabularies of Langua- | ges, Historical and Geological Facts, &c. &c. &c. | By C. S. Rafinesque, A. M. . . Ph. D. | Professor of Historical and Natural Sciences, Member of seve- | ral learned societies in Europe and America, &c. | [Quotation and list of figures, six lines.] | Philadelphia: | 1832-1833. | (Two dollars.) Tabular view recto blank 1 1. title verso index 1 1. iconography and illustrations etc. 1 1. text pp. 1-202,205-212,8°. Originally issued in numbers (1-8, and extra of no. 3), from the "spring of 1832" to the "winter of 1833." American history. Tabular View of the American Generic Languages, and Original Nations, including the Chinuc, pp. 6-8. Languages of Oregon, Chopunish and Chinuo (pp. 133-134) contains a vocabulary, English and Chinuc, thirty-three words (including numerals 1-10), from Cox, Lewis, and other sources, p. 134. Copies seen: Boston Athenaeum, British Museum, Congress, Eames. These two articles reprinted in: Priest (J.), American antiquities, pp. 309-312, 395-397, Albany, 1833,8°. Constantine Samuel Rafinesque, botanist, horn in Galatz, a suburb of Constantinople, Turkey, in 1784, died in Philadelphia, Pa., September 18,1842. He was of French parentage, and his father, amerchant, died in Philadelphia about 1791. The son came to Philadelphia with his brother in 1802, and, aftertraveling through Pennsylvania and Delaware, returned with a collection of botanical specimens in 1805 and Vent to Sicily, where he spent ten years as a merchant and in the study of botany. In 1815 he sailed for New York, but was shipwrecked ton the Long island coaSt, and lost his valuable books, collections, manuscripts-, and drawings. In 1818 he went to the west and became professor of botany in Transylvailia University, Lexington, Ky. Subsequently he traveled and lectured in various places, endeavored to establish a magazine and botanic garden, but without success, and finally settled in Philadelphia, where he resided until his death, and where he published The Atlantic Journal and Eriend of Knowledge; a Cyclopaedic Journal and Review, Of which only eight numbers appeared (1832-'33). The number of genera and species that he Rafinesque (C. S.) —Continued. introduced into his works produced great co? fusion. A gradual deterioration is found Bafinesque's botanical writings from 1819 tiffl 1830, when the passion for establishing nea genera and species seems to have become a monomania with him. He assumed thirty-ffi one hundred years as the average time required for the production of a new species and nvS hundred to a thousand years for a new genus." It is said that he wrote a paper describJM '' twelve new species of thunder and lightninaB In addition to translations and unfinished botanical and zoological works, he was the author of numerous books and pamphlets.—Appleton'9 Cyclop, of Am. Biog. [Reade (John).] Chinookversus Greek! In Montreal Gazette, vol. 119, no. 239, p. 4, Montreal, October 6,1890. (Pilling.) A review of Hale (H.), An mternationaM idiom. Contains a general disoussion of the Chinook] Jargon, with a number of examples. Reviews: Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon See Charencey (C. de.) Crane (A.) Leland (C. G.) Reade (J.) Western. Richardson (Albert Deane). Beyond the! Mississippi: | from the great river to the great ocean. | Life and adventure! | on the | prairies, mountains, and Pacific coast. | With more than two hundred illustrations, from photo-| graphs and original | sketches, of thei- prairies, deserts, mountains, rivers,! mines, | cities, Indians, trappers, pion-J eers, and great natural | curiosities ofl the new states and territories. | 1857-j 1867. | By | Albert D. Richardson, 11 author of 'Field, dungeon and escape.' 1 | [Two lines advertisement.] | Hartford, Conn., | American pub~J lishing company. | National publishing! company, | Philadelphia, Pa., Cincin-J nati, O., Chicago, 111., St. Louis, Mo., | -j New Orleans, La., Atlanta, Ga., Rich-j mond, Va. | Bliss "& company, New| York. | 1867. Engraved title.- Beyond | the | Mississippi | I Albert D. Richardson. Map, engraved title verso blank, title verso I copyright notice 11. extracts from Whittier and I Longfellow verso blank 1-1. prefatory pp. i—ii, | illustrations pp. iii-vii, contents pp. ix-xvi, text % pp. 17-572,8°. Short vocabulary (20 words, alphabetically ■^ CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 63 Richardson (A. D.) — Continued. arranged by English words) of the Chinook ' Jargon, and the numerals 1-10,20,30,100,1000 in the same, pp. 502-503. Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenaeum, British Museum, Congress, Trumbull. Some copies vary slightly in the imprint, and omit the date. (Eames, Harvard.) Another edition: Hartford, 1869, 8°. (*) A later edition with title-page as follows: Beyond the Mississippi: | from the great river to the great ocean. | Life and adventure | on the | prairies, mountains, and Pacific coast. | With more than two hundred illustrations, from photographs and original | sketches, of the prairies, deserts, mountains, rivers, mines, | cities, Indians, trappers, pioneers, and great natural | curiosities of the new states and territories. | New edition. | Written down to summer of 1869. | By | Albert D. Richardson, | author of i Field, dungeon and escape,' and 'Personal j history of Ulysses S. Grant.' | [Two lines advertisement.] | Hartford: | American publishing company, | 1875. 2 p. 11. pp. i-xvi, 17-572,8°. Linguistic contents as under title next above. Copies seen: Trumbull. Albert Deano Richardson, journalist, born in Franklin, Mass., October 6, 1833, died in New York city December 2,1869. He was educated at the district school of his native village and at Holliston academy. At eighteen years of age he went to Pittsburg, Pa., where he formed a newspaper connection, wrote a farce for Barney Williams, and appeared a few times en the stage. Tn 1857 ho went to Kansas, taking an active part in the political struggle of the territory, attending antislavery meetings, makingspeeches, and corresponding about the issues of the hour with the Boston Journal. He was also secretary of the territorial legislature. Two years later he went to Pike's Peak, the gold fever being then at its height, in company with Horace Greeley, between whom and Richardson a lasting friendship was formed. In the autumn of 1859 he made a journey through the southwestern territories, and sent accounts •of his wanderings to eastern journals. During the winter that preceded the civil war he volunteered to go through the south as secret correspondent of the Tribune, and returned, after many narrow escapes, just before the firing on !Sumter. He next entered the field as war cor- Tespondent, and for two years alternated between Virginia and the southwest, being present at many battles. On the night of May 3,1863, he undertook, in company with Junius -Henri -Browne, a fellow correspondent of the Richardson (A. D.) — Continued. Tribune, and Richard T. Colburn, of the New York World, to run the batteries of Yicksburg on two barges, which were lashed to a steam tug. After they had been under fire for more than half an hour, a large shell struck the tug, and, bursting in the furnace, threw the coals on the barges and then set them on fire. Out of 34 men, 18 were killed or wounded and 16 were captured, the correspondents among them. The Confederate government would neither release nor exchange the Tribune men, who, after spending eighteen months in seven southern prisons, escaped from Salisbury, N. C, in the dead of winter, and, walking 400 miles, arrived within the national lines at Strawberry Plains, Tenn., several months before the close of the war.—Appleton's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. Ross (Alexander). Adventures | of the first settlers on the | Oregon or Columbia river: | being | a narrative of the expedition fitted out by | John Jacob Astor, | to establish the | " Pacific fur company;" | with an account of some | Indian tribes on the coast of the Pacific. | By Alexander Ross, | one of the adventurers. | London: | Smith, Elder and co., 65 CornhLU. | 1849. Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. iii-v, contents pp. vi-xv, errata p. [xvi], text pp. 1-352,12°. Vocabulary of the Chinook (200 words) and numerals (1-5000), pp. 342-348.—Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon (30 words), p. 349. Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athenaeum, British Museum, Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Trumbull. Alexander Ross, author, born in Nairnshire, Scotland, May 9, 1783, died in Colony Gardens (now in Winnipeg, Manitoba), Red River Settlement, British North America, October 23, 1856. He came to Canada in 1805, taught in Glengarry, U. C, and in 1810 joined John Jacob Aster's expedition to Oregon. Until 1824 he was a fur-trader and in the servioe of the Hudson Bay Company. About 1825 he removed to the Red River settlement and was a member of the council of Assineboia, and was sheriff of the Red River settlement for several years. He was for fifteen years a resident in the territories of thoHudson Bay Company, and has given the result of his observations in the works: Adventures of the First Settlers on the Oregon or Columbia River j being a Narrative of the Expedition fitting out by John Jacob Astor to establish the Pacific Fur Company, with an Account of some Indian Tribes on the Coast of the Pacific (London, 1849); The Fur-Hunters of the Far West, a Narrative of Adventures in the Oregon and Rocky Mountains (2 Vols. 1855), and The Red River Settlement (1856):—Api>I«- ton's Cyclop, of Am-. Biog < / 64 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE S. Sabin (Joseph). A | dictionary | of | Books relating to America, | from its discovery to the present time. | By Joseph Sabin. | Volume I[-XX]. | [Three lines quotation.] | New-York: | Joseph Sabin, 84 Nassau street. | 1868[-1892]. 20 vols. 8°. Still in course of publication. Parts oxv-cxvi, which begin vol. 20, reach the article "Smith." Now edited by Mr. Wilber- force Eames. Contains, passim, titles of books in and relating to the Chinookan languages. Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Geological Survey, Lenox. See Field (T. W.) [St. Onge (Rev. Louis Napoleon).] History of the old testament. | Age I. | From Adam to Abraham. | Containing 2083 Years.- [Kamloops, B. C.: 1892.] No title-page, heading only; text in the Chinook Jargon, stenographic characters, with English headings in italics, pp. 1-24,16°. Forms a supplement to Le Jeune (J. M. Ii.), Kamloops Wawa, vol. 2, nos. 1-6 (nos. 33-38 of the series), July 3-August 7,1892. Copies seen: Pilling. -J- | Bible history | translated | into the Chinook Jargon by | the Rev. L. N. Saint Onge Missionary | among the Yakamas and other Indian tribes of the Territo- | ries of Washington, Idaho, Montana, and of | Oregon. | A. M. D. G. | 1892. Manuscript; title verso blank 11. preface 13 leaves, written on one side only, text (in the Jargon with interlinear English translation, written on both sides) 11.1-142,4°. In possession of Dr. T. S. Bulmer, Cedar City, Utah, who intends incorporating it in one of his publications on the Chinook Jargon. Father St. Onge informs me that he intends publishing this paper separately also, under the title of :' Chinook Jargon translation of the Epitome Historiae Sacrae." Chinook Jargon Dictionary | by | L. N. Saintonge, Ptre. | English-Chinook Jargon. | Part first. | Troy, N. Y., U. S. A.: | 1892. | A. M. D. G. Manuscript; title verso note 11. text (alphabetically arranged by English words) pp. 1-184, 8°. Recorded in a blank book bound in leather. Tn possession of its author. Chinook Wawa [writing], pp. 1-181—Sounds of the letters used, pp. 1X2-184. St. Onge (L.N.) —Continued. Thedictionary contains probably 6,000 words. Concerning the second part of this work, Father Saintongo writes me, under date of January 24,1893, as follows: " I am not now working at my dictionary (second part) because I am not well enough, but I intend to finish it as soon as I can. I can not have it published now because I have not the means for that purpose. You may say it is intended for publication some time in the future. The second part will not he so voluminous as the first; the list of words will not be so great, but the definitions will take greater space, as I shall give the etymology and source from which each Jargon word comes." Hymns in the Chinook Jargon. In Bulmer (T. S.), Hymns, songs, &C, in Chinook Jargon (manuscript), 11.34-45. [Legends in the Chinook Jargon.] In Bulmer (T. S.), Appendix to Buhner's Chinook Jargon grammar and dictionary (manuscript) 11.26-57,4°. , Accompanied by an interlinear translation in English. See Bulmer (T. S.) See Demers (M.), Blanchet (F.N.) and St. Onge (L.N.) " The subject of this sketch, the Rev. Louis N. St. Onge, of St. Alphonse de Liguori parish, was born [in the village of St. Cesaire] a few miles south of Montreal, Canada, April 14,1812. Ho finished his classical course when yet very young, after which he studied law for two years. Feeling called to another field, he gave up this career in order to prepare himself to work for God's glory as an Indian missionary in the diocese of Nesqually, Washington Territory. "A year and a half before his ordination, Right Rev. A.M.Blanchet,his bishop, ordered . him to Vancouver, W. T., where he was occupied as a professor of natural philosophy, astronomy, and other branches in the Holy Angel's College. All his spare time was consecrated to the study of the Indian languages, in which he is to-day one of the most expert, so that he was ready to go on active missionary work as soon as ordained. "The first years of his missionary life were occupied in visiting different tribes of Indians and doing other missionary work in the Territories of Washington, Idaho, Montana, and other Rocky Mountain districts, among Indians and miners. After such labors he was then appointed to take charge of the Yakamas, Klikitats, Winatchas, Wishrams, Pshwanwa- pams, Narchez, and other Indian tribes inhabiting tho central part of Washington Territory. Having no means of support in his new mis- CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 65 8t. Onge (L. N.)— Continued. sioii, Bishop Blanchet, in his self-sacrificing charity fox* tho Indians of his extensive diocese, furnished him with the necessary outfit; and with a number of willing though unskilled Indians as apprentice carpenters, the young missionary set to work to rebuild the St. Joseph's mission, destroyed in 1856 by a party of vandals called the Oregon "Volunteers, who had been sent to fight the Yakamas. "After four years of labor, he and his devoted companion, Mr. J. B. Boulet (now ordained and stationed among the Tulalip Indians) had the satisfaction to see not only a comfortable residence, but also a neat church, erected, and a fine tract of land planted with fruit trees, and in a profitable state of cultivation, where formerly only ruin and desolation reigned. "His health breaking down entirely, he was forced to leave his present and daily increasing congregation of neophites. "Wishing to give him the best medical treatment, Bishop Blanchet sent Fat her St. Onge to his native land with a leave of absence until his health would be restored. During his eighteen months' stay in a hospital he, however, utilized his time by composing and printing two small Indian books, containing rules of grammar, catechism, hymns, and Christian prayers in Yakama and Chinook languages—the former for children, the latter for the use of missionaries on the Pacific coast. "By liif advice of his physician he then undertook a voyage to Europe, where he spent nearly a year in search of health. Back again to this country, he had charge of a congregation for a couple of years in Vermont; and now he is the pastor of the two French churches of Glens Falls and Sandy Hill, in the diocese of Albany, New York. "Father St.Onge,though a man of uncom* mon physical appearance, stoutly built and six feet and four inches in height, has not yet entirely recovered Ins health and strength. The French population of Glens Falls have good cause for feeling very muoh gratified with the present condition of the affairs of the parish of St. Alphonse de Liguori, and should receive the hearty congratulations of the entire community. Father St. Onge, a man of great erudition, a devoted servant to the church, and possessing a personality whose geniality and courtesy have won him a place in the hearts of his people, has by his faithful application to his parish developed it and brought out all that was to inure to its benefit and farther advance its interests."—Glens Falls (2f. Y.) Republican^ March $8,1889. Father St. Onge remained at Glens Falls until October, 1891, when increasing infirmities compelled him to retire permanently from the ministry. He is now living with his brother, the rector of St. Jean Baptiste church, in Troy, 7SC. Y. Since his retirement ho has compiled an English-Chinook Jargon dictionary of about CHIN 5 St. Onge (L. N.)— Continued. six thousand words, and this he intends to supplement with a corresponding Jargon-English part. He has also begun the preparation of a Yakama dictionary, which he hopes to make much more complete than that of Father Pandosy, published in Dr. Shea's Library of American linguistics. 1 have adopted the spelling of his name as it appears on the title-page of Bishop Demers's Chinook Jargon dictionary, though the true spelling, and the one he uses now, is Saint- onge—that of a French province in which his ancestors lived and from which four or five families came in 1696, all adopting the name. His family name is Payant. Sayce (Archibald Henry). Introduction to the | science of language. | By | A. H. Sayco, | deputy professor of comparative philology in the university of Oxford. | In two volumes. | VoLI[-H]. | [Design.] | London: | C. Kegan Paul & co., 1, Paternoster square. | 1880. 2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso quotation and notice 11. preface pp. v-viii, tahle of contents verso blank 11. text pp. 1-141. colophon verso blank 11.; half-title verso blank 11. title verso quotation and notice 11. table of contents verso blank 11. text pp. 1-352, selected list of works pp. 353-363, index pp. 365-421,12°. A classification of American languages (vol. 2, pp. 57-64) inoludes the Chinook, p. 60. Copies seen .* Bureau of Ethnology, Eames. Schoolcraft (Henry Rowe). Historical | and I statistical information, | respecting the | history, condition and prospects | of the | Indian tribes of the United States: | collected and prepared under the direction | of the | bureau of Indian affairs, | per act of Congress of March 3d, 1847, | by Henry R. Sohool- craft, LL.D. | Illustrated by S. Eastman, capt. U. S. A. | Published by Authority of Congress. | Part I[-V1J. | Philadelphia: | Lippincott,Grambo & company, | (successors to Grigg, Elliot & co.) | 1851[-1857]. Engraved title.- [Engraving.] | Historical | and | statistical information j respecting the | history, condition and prospects' of the | Indian tribes of the United States: | Colleoted and prepared under the | direotion of the bureau of Indian affairs, per act of Congress { of Maroh 3rf1847 | by Henry R. SobooloraftL.L.D. | Illtis, tratI'd by | S. Eastman, capt. IT. S. army. | [Coat of arms.] | Published by authority of Congress. | Part 1 [-VI]. | Philadelphia: | Lippincott, Grambo & co. 6 vols. 4°. Beginning with vol. 2 the words "Historical and statistical" are left off the i 66 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Schoolcraft (H. R.) — Continued. title-pages, both engraved and printed. Subsequently (1853) vol. 1 was also issued with the abridged title beginning "Information respecting the history, condition, and prospects of the Indian tribes," making it uniform with the other parts. Two editions with these title-pages were published by the same house, one on thinner and . somewhat smaller paper, of which but vols 1-5 were issued. Part i, 1851. Half-title (Ethnological researches, | respecting | the red man of America) verso blank 1 1. engraved title as above verso blank 11. printed title as above verso blank 11. introductory documents pp. iii-vi, preface pp. vii-x, list of plates pp. xi-xii, contents pp. xiii- xviii, text pp. 13-524, appendix pp. 525-568, plates, colored lithographs and maps numbered 1-76. Part II, 1852. Half-title (as in part I) verso blank 11. engraved title (Information respecting the history, condition and prospects, etc.) verso blank 11. printed title (Information respecting thehistory, condition and prospects, etc.) verso printers 11. dedication verso blankl 1. introductory document pp.vii-xiv, contents pp. xv-xxii, list of plates pp. xxiii-xxiv, text pp. 17-608,. plates and maps numbered 1-29, 31-78, and 2 plates exhibiting the Cherokee alphabet audits application. Part in, 1853. Half-title (as in part I) verso blankl 1.engraved title (as in part ii) versoblank 11. printed title (as in part n) verso printer 11. third report pp. v-viii, list of divisions p. ix, contents xi-xv, list of plates pp. xvii- xviii, text pp. 19-635, plates and maps numbered 1-21,25-45. Part IV, 1854. Half-title (as in part I) verso blankll. engraved title (as in part ii) verso blank 1 1. printed title (as in part ii) verso blank 1 1. dedication pp. v-vi, fourth report pp. vii-x, list of divisions p. xi, contents pp. xiii-xxiii, list of plates pp. xxv-xxvi, text pp. 19-668, plates and maps numbered 1-42. Part v, 1855. Half-title (as in part I) verso blankl 1. engraved title (as in part ii) verso blank 11. printed title (as in part n) verso blank 11. dedication pp.vii-viii, fifth reportpp. ix-xii, list of divisions p, xiii, synopsis of general contents of vols, i-v pp. xv-xvi, contents pp. xvii-xxii, list of plates pp. xxiii-xxiv, text pp. 25-625, appendix pp. 627-712, plates and maps numbered 1-8,19-36. Part vi, 1857. Half-title (General history | of the | North American Indians) verso blank 11. portrait 11. printed title (History | of the | Indian tribes of the United States: | their | present oonditionand prospeots, [ and a sketch of their | ancient status. | Published by order of congress, I under the direction of the department of the interior—Indian bureau. |By | Henry Howe Schoolcraft, LL. D. I Member [&c. six lines.] | TVithUlustrationsbyEminentArtists. | In one volume. | Part vi of the series. | Philadelphia: I J. B. Lippincott & co. J1857.) verso blank.11. Schoolcraft (H. R.) — Continued. inscription verso blank 1 1. letter to the presides t pp. vii-viii, report pp. ix-x, preface pp. xi- xvi, contents pp. xvii-xxvi, list of plates pp. xxvii-xxviii, text pp. 25-744, index pp. 745-766, fifty-seven plates, partly selected from the other volumes, and three tables. Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon (340 words alphabetically arranged by English words) vol. 5, pp. 548-551. Emmons (G. E.), Replies to inquiries respect* ing the Indian tribes of Oregon and California, . vol. 3, pp. 200-225. Gallatin (A.), Table of generic Indian families of speech, vol. 3, pp. 397-402. Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athenseum, British Museum, Congress, Eames, National Museum, Powell, Shea, Trumbull. AttheEischersale, no.1581, Quaritch bought a copy for 41.10s. The Eield copy, no. 2075, sold for $72; the Menzies copy, no. 1765, for $132; the Squier copies, no. 1214, $120; no. 2032, $60; the Ramirez copy, no. 773 (5 vols.), 51.5s.; thePinart copy, no. 828 (5 vols, in 4), 208 fr.; the Murphy copy, no. 2228, $69. Priced by Quaritch, no. 30017, lOi.lOs.; by Clarke & co.l886,$65;-byQuaritch, in 1888,151. Reissued with title-pages as follows: Archives [ of | Aboriginal Knowledge. | Containing all the | Original Papers laid before Congress | respecting the ] History, Antiquities, Language, Ethnology, Pictography, | Rites, Superstitions, and Mythology, | of the | Indian Tribes of the United States | by | Henry R. Schoolcraft, LL. D. | With Illustrations. | Onaendun ih ieu muzzinyegun un.—Algonquin. | In six volumes. | Volume I [-VI]. | Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & Co. | 1860. Engraved title.- Information | respecting the | History, Condition and Prospects | of the | Indian Tribes of the United States: | Collected and prepared under the | Bureau of Indian Affairs | By Henry R. Schoolcraft L. L. D. | Mem: Royal Geo. Society, London. Royal Antiquarian Society. Copenhagen. Ethnological Society, Paris, &c. &c. | Illustrated by | Cap.' S. Eastman,U. S.A. andother eminent artists. | [Vignette.] | Published by authority of Congress. | Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & Co. 6 vols, maps and plates, 4°. This edition agrees in the text page for page with the original titled above, and contains in addition an index to each volume. Copies seen: Congress. Partially reprinted with title as follows: [ ] The | Indian tribes] of the| United States: | their [history, antiquities, customs, religion, arts, language, [ tradi- CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 67 Schoolcraft (H. R.) — Continued. tions, oral legends, and myths. | Edited hylFrancisS.Drake. | Hlustratedwith one hundred fine engravings on steel. | In two volumes. | Vol. I[-II] • | Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & co. | London: 16 Southampton street, Covent Garden. | 1884. 2 vols.: portrait 1 1. title verso copyright notice 11. preface pp. 3-5, contents pp. 7-8, list of plates pp. 9-10, introduction pp. 11-24, text pp. 25-458; frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright notice 1 1. contents pp. 3-6, list of plates p. 7, text pp. 9-445, index pp. 447-455, plates, 4°. ' 'In the following pages the attempt has been made to place before the public in a convenient and accessible form the results of the life-long labors in the field of aboriginal research of the late Henry R Schoolcraft." Chapter II, Language, literature, and pictography, vol. 1, pp. 47-63, contains general remarks on the Indian languages. Copies seen: Congress. Priced by Clarke & co. 1886, no. 6376, $25. Henry Rowe Schoolcraft, ethnologist, born in [■Watervliet] Albany county. If. T., March 28, 1793, died in "Washington, D. C, December 10, 1864. "Was educated at Middlebury college, Vermont, and at Union, where he pursued the studies of chemistry and mineralogy. In 1817-'18 he traveled in Missouri and Arkansas, and returned with a large collection of geological and mineralogical specimens. In 1820 he was appointed geologist to Gen. Lewis Cass's exploring expedition to Lake Superior and the headwaters of Mississippi River. He was secretary of a commission to treat with the Indians at Chicago, and, after a journey through Illinois and along "Wabash and Miami rivers, was in 1822 appointed Indian agent for the tribes of the lake region, establishing himself at Sault Sainte Marie, and afterward at Mackinaw, where, in 1823, he married Jane Johnston, granddaughter of "Waboojeeg, a noted Ojibway chief, who received her education in Europe. In 1828 hefounded the Michigan historical society and in 1831 the Algic society. Erom 1828 till 1832 he was a member of the territorial legisla- tureof Michigan. In 1832 he led a government expedition, which followed the Mississippi River up to its source in Itasca Lake. In 1836 he negotiated a treaty with the Indians on the upper lakes for the cession totheUnited States of 16,000,000 acres of their lands. He was then appointed acting superintendent of Indian affairs, and in 1839 chief disbursing agent for the northern department. On his return from Europe in 1842 he made a tour through western Virginia, Ohio, and Canada. He was appointed by the New York legislature in 1845 a commissioner to take the census of the Indians in the state and collect information concerning the Six Nations. After the performance of this task, Congress authorized him, on March 3,1847, to obtain through the Indian bureau reports Schoolcraft (H.R.) — Continued. relating to all the Indian tribes of the country, and to collate and edit {he information. In this work he spent the remaining years of his life. Through his influence many laws were enacted for the protection and benefit of the Indians. Numerous scientific societies in the United States and Europe elected him to membership, and the University of Geneva gave him the degree of LL.D. in 1846. He was the author of numerous poems, lectures, and reports on Indian subjects, besides thirty-one larger works. Two of his lectures before the Algic society at Detroit on the "Grammatical Construction of the Indian Languages'' were translated into Erench by Peter S. Duponceau, and gained for their author a gold medal from the Erench institute. . . . To the five volumes of Indian researches compiled under the direction of the war department he added a sixth, containing the post-Columbian history of the Indians and of their relations with Europeans (Philadelphia, 1857). Hehad collected material for two additional volumes, but the Government suddenly suspended the publication of the work.—AppleUm's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. Scouler (Dr. John). Observations on the indigenous tribes of the N. W. coast of America. By John Scouler, M. D., F. L. S., &c. In Royal Geog. Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 11, pp. 215-251, London, 1841,8°. (Congress.) Includes vocabularies of a number of the languages of the region named, among them the Chinook (entrance to Colombia River) and Cathlascon (banks of the Columbia), pp. 242- 247. Eurnished the author by Dr."W. F. Tolmie. Extracts from these vocabularies appear in Gibbs (G.), Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. On the Indian Tribes inhabiting the Norlh-West Coast of America. By John Scouler, M.D., F. L. S. Communicated by the Ethnological Society. In Edinburgh New Philosoph. Jour. vol. 41, pp. 168-192, Edinburgh, 1846,8°. (Congress.) Vocabulary (19 wordsl of the Chikeelis [Chinook Jargon], compared with the Tlaoquatch (of Tolmie)and theNootkanfof Mozino) p. 176. Reprinted in the Ethnological Soc. of London Jour. vol. 1, pp. 228-252, Edinburgh, n. d., 8°, the vocabulary occurring on p. 236. Semple (J. E.) Vocabulary of the Clatsop language. Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology, 'Washington, D. C. Collected in 1870 near Eort Stevens, Oregon. Contains 35 words only. Sentences: Cascade See Lee (D.) and Erost (J. H.) Chinook Eranchere (G.) Chinook Jargon Allen (A.) Chinook Jargon Chinook. Chinook Jargon Dictionary. -^- m 68 Sentences — Continued. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Clakama Sermons: Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon See Eells (M.) Green (J. S.) Hale (H.) Leland (C. G.) Macfie (M.) Macdonald (D.G. Stuart (G.) Gatschet (A. S.) E.) Se Eells (M.) Hale(H.) New. Shortess (Robert). Vocabulary of the Lower Chinook. Manuscript; title verso blank 1 1. text 5 11. written on one side only, folio; in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Collected in 1853. Contains 180 words. Smith (Silas B.) On the Chinook names of tho salmon in the Columbia River. By Silas B. Smith. In National Museum Proc. vol. 4, pp. 391-392, "Washington, 1882,8°. (Pilling.) Comprises a half-dozen names only. Smithsonian Institution: These words following a title or within parentheses after a note indir cate that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of that institution,"Washington, D. C. Songs: Chinook Chinook Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon See Boas (P.) Eells (M.) Bulmer (T. S.) Crane (A.) Sproat (Gilbert Malcolm). Scenes and studies | of savage life. | By | Gilbert Malcolm Sproat. | [Two lines quotation.] | London: Smith, Elder and co. | 1868. Frontispiece 11. title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-x, preface pp. xi-xii, text pp. 1-310, appendix pp. 311-317, colophon p. [318], 12°. Chapter xv. Intellectual capacity and language (pp. 119-143) includes a vocabulary of 14 words showing affinities between the Chinook Jargon and Aht, p. 139.—General discussion of the languages, including the Chinook Jargon, with examples, pp. 139-142.—Note on the Chinook and Jargon- Chinook, pp. 313-314. Copies seen.- Bancroft, Boston Public, British Museum, Congress, Eames, Georgetown. Stanley (J. M.) Portraits | of | North American Indians, | with sketches of scenery, etc. | painted by | J. M. Stanley. | Deposited with | the Smithsonian institution.! [Sealof the institution.] | Washington: | Smithsonian institution. | December, 1852. Stanley (J. M.) — Continued. Cover title as above, title as above verso names of printers 11. preface verso contents 11. text pp. 5-72, index pp. 73-76,8°. Eorms Smithsonian Institution Miscellaneous Collections, 53; also part of vol. 2 of the same series, "Washington, 1862. Contains the names of personages of many Indian tribes of the United States, toanumber of which is added the English signification. Among the peoples represented are the Chi- nooks, p. 60; Clackamas, p. 61. Copies seen: Bnreau of Ethnology, Eames, Geological Survey, Pilling, Smithsonian, 'Wellesley. Steiger(E.) Steiger's | bibliotheca glot- tica, | part first. | A catalogue of | Dictionaries, Grammars, Readers, Expositors, etc. | of mostly ] modern languages | spoken in all parts of the earth, | except of | English, French, German, and Spanish. | First division: | Abenaki to Hebrew. | E. Steiger, | 22 & 24 Frankfort Street, | New York. [1874.] Half-title on cover, title as above verso name of printer 1 1. notice dated Sept. 1874 verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-40, advertisements 211. colophon on back cover, 12°. Titles of works relating to American languages generally, p. 3; Chinook, p. 24. The second division of the first part was not published. Part second is on the English language and part third on the German language. In his notice the compiler states:'' This com-' pilation must not be regarded as an attempt at a complete linguistic bibliography, but solely as a bookseller's catalogue for business purposes, with special regard to the study of philology in America." '■'ji-'^ Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. Stuart (Granville). Montana as it is; | being | a general description of its resources, | both mineral and agricultural, | including a | complete description of the face of the | country, its climate, etc.,| illustrated with a | map of the territory, | drawn by capt. W.W. De Lacy, | showing the different roads and the location of | the different mining districts. | To which is appended, | a complete dictionary | of | the Snake language, | and also of the | famous Chinnook [sic'] Jargon, | with | numerous critical and explanatory notes, | concerning the habits, superstitions, etc., of | these Indians, | with | itineraries of all the routes across the plains. | By Granville Stuart. | CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 69 Stuart (G.) — Continued. New York: | C. S. Westcott & co., printers, | No. 79 John street. | 1865. Half-title: A | dictionary | of the | Chinnook Jargon, | in use among the tribes of | Oregon, "Washington territory, British Columbia, | and the north Pacific coast, | with | critical and explanatory notes. | By Granville Stuart. Cover title as above; large folded map, title as above verso copyright notice 11. preface pp. 3-4, text pp. 5-98, half-title verso blank 1 1. preface verso rules of pronunciation pp. 101- 102, text pp. 103-175,8°. Dictionary of the Chinnook Jargon, alphabetically arranged by English words, pp. 103- 119.—Numerals 1-10, 20, 30,100, 1000, p. 119.— Short dialogue in Chinnook Jargon, pp. 120- 121.—Explanatory notes, pp. 122-127. Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Congress, Eames, Georgetown. Swan (James Gilchrist). The [ northwest coast; | or, | three years' residence in Washington | territory. | By James G. Swan. | [Territorial seal.] | With numerous illustrations. | New York: | Harper & brothers, publishers, | Franklin square. | 1857. Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright notice 11. dedication verso blank 11. introduction pp. v-vii, contents pp. ix-xiv, list of illustrations p. [xv], map, text pp. 17-409, appendix pp. 411-429, index pp. 431-435,12°. Language of the Indians (pp. 306-326) contains remarks on the Jargon, different methods' of spelling words by writers, difficulty of rightly understanding the Jargon, etc., including a comparative vocabulary of Nootka, Chenook dialect or Jargon, and English (11 words), -p. 307; explanation of a number of Jargon words, pp. 316-317.—Vocabulary of the Chenook or Jargon (about 250 words, alphabet- ioally arranged) and numerals 1-1000, pp. 415- 421.—Comparative list of 12 words in Nootka, and Chenook or Jargon, p. 422.—Many Chinook terms passim. Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, British Swan (J. G.) — Continued. Museum, Congress, Eamos, Geological Survey, Harvard, Pilling. Issued also with title-page as follows: The | northwest coast; | or, | three years' residence in Washington | territory. | By | James G. Swan. | With numerous illustrations. | London: | Sampson Low, Son & co., 47 Ludgate hill. | New York: Harper & brothers. | 1857. Frontispiece 1 1. title 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. v-vii, contents pp. ix-xiv, list of illustrations p. xv, map, text pp. 17-409, appendix pp. 411-429, index pp. 431- 435,12°. Linguistic contents asundertitlenext above. Copies seen: Charles L. "Woodward, New York City. Mr. James Gilchrist Swan was born in Med- ford, Mass., January 11,1818, and was educated at an academy in that place. In 1833 he went to Boston to reside, and remained there until 1849, when he left for San Francisco, where he arrived in 1850. In 1852 he went to Shoalwater Bay, where he remained until 1856, when he returned east. In 1859 he returned to Puget Sound; since then Port Townsend has been his headquarters. In i860 Mr. Swan went to Neah Bay. In June, 1862, he was appointed teacher of the Makah Indian Reservation, where he remained till 1866. In 1869 he went to Alaska, and in May, 1875, he went a second time to Alaska, this tame under the direction of the Smithsonian Institution, as a commissioner to purchase articles of Indian manufacture for the Philadelphia Centennial Exposition. This fine collection is now in the U. S. National Museum at "Washington. July 31,1878, Mr. Swan was appointed an inspector of customs at Neah Bay, Cape Flattery, and remained there until August, 1888, addingmuch to our knowledge of the Makah Indians, which was reported to Prof. Baird and published in a bulletin of the U S. National Museum. In 1883 he went to Queen Charlotte Islands for the Smithsonian Institution and made another collection for the U. S. National Museum. T. Tate (Rev. Charles Montgomery). Chinook | As Spoken by the Indians | of | Washington Territory, British Columbia I and Alaska. | For the use of Traders, Tourists and others | who have business intercourse with | the Indians. | Chinook-English. English- Chinook. | By | rev. C. M. Tate, | Published by M. W. Waitt & co., | Victoria, B. C. [1889.] Cover title (as above, with the addition of the following around the border: Bourchier & Higgins, | real estate brokers. | Insurance Tate (C. M.) —Continued. agents. | Financial agents), title as above verso copyright notice (1889) and name of printer 11. preface (May 17,1889) verso blank 11. text pp. 5-47,16°. Parti. Chinook [Jargon]-English, alphabetically arranged, pp. 5-23.—Part LT. English- Chinook [Jargon], alphabetically arranged, pp. 24-47.—Numerals, 1-12,20,50,100, p. 47. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. [Hymn in the Chinook language. J Manuscript, 1 leaf, 8°, in the possession of the> compiler of this bibliography. One v erse and chorus of the hymn "Nothing but the blood of Jesus." 70 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE S?S \i Tate (C. M.) —Continued. " Mr. Tate oame to British Columbia from Northumberland, England, in 1870. He engaged in mission work among the Flathead Indians at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, in 1871, where he learned the Aukamenum language spoken by the Indian tribes on the east coast of Vancouver Island, lower Fraser River, and Puget Sound. Here he spent three years, when he removed to Port Simpson, on the borders of Alaska, among the Tsimpsheans. He next moved to the Fraser River and spent seven years amongst the Flathead tribes between Vale and "Westminster, frequently visiting the Indians on the Nootsahk River in "Washington Territory. Mr. Tate spent four years, 1880 to 1884, among the Bella-Bellas, returning in the latter year to the mission on'Fraser River." Ten commandments: Chinook Jargon Texts: Chinook Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon See Everette ("W. E.) See Boas (F.) Bulmer (T. S.) Demers (M.) Dictionary. Eells (M.) Tolmie (Dr. William Fraser). [Vocabularies of certain languages of the northwest coast of America.] In Scouler (J.), Observations on the indigenous tribes of northwest America, in Royal Geog. Soc. of London Jour. vol. 11, pp. 215-251, London, 1841,8°. Includes, among others, vocabularies of the Chenook and Cathlascon, pp. 242-247. and Dawson (G. M.) Geological and natural history survey of Canada. | Alfred R. C. Selwyn, F. R. S., F. G. S., Director. | Comparative vocabularies | of the | Indian tribes | of | British Columbia, | with a map illustrating distribution. | By | W. Fraser Tolmie, | Licentiate of the Faculty of Physicians and Surgeons, Glasgow. | And | George M. Dawson, D.S., A.S.R.M.,F.G.S.,&c. [Coat of arms.] | Published by authority of Parliament. Montreal: | Dawson brothers. | 1884. Cover title nearly as above, title as above verso blank 11. letter of transmittal signed by G. M. Dawson verso blank 11. preface signed by G. M. Dawson pp. 56-76, introductory note signed by "W. F. Tolmie pp. 96-126, text pp. 146- 1316, map, 8°. Vocabulary (243 words) of the Tshinook tribe.and of the Tilhilooit or upper Tshinook, pp. 506-615.—Comparison of words in various Indian languages of North America, among them a few in the Chinook, pp. 1286-1306. Copies seen: Eames, Georgetown, Pilling, ■Wellesley. Tolmie (W. F.) — Continued. ■William Fraser Tolmie was born at Inverness, Scotland, February 3, 1812, and died Decembers, 1886, after an illness of only threedays, at his residence, Cloverdale,Victoria, B. C. He was educated at Glasgow University, where he graduated in August, 1832. On September 12 of the same year he accepted a position as surgeon and clerk with the Hudson's Bay Company, and left home for the Columbia River, arriving in Vancouver in the spring of 1833. Vancouver was then the chief post of the Hudson's Bay Company on this coast. In 1841 he visited his native land, but returned in 1842 overland via the plains and the Columbia, and was placed in charge of the Hudson's Bay posts on Puget Sound. Heheretookaprominentpart, during the Indian war of 1855-'56, in pacifying the Indians. Being an excellent linguist, he had acquired a knowledge of the native tongues and was instrumental in bringing about peace between the Americans and the Indians. He was appointed chief factor of the Hudson's Bay Company in 1855, removed to Vancouver Island in 1859, when he went into stock-raising, being * the first to introduce thoroughbred stock into British Columbia; was a member of the local legislature two terms, until 1878; was a member of the first board of education for several years, exercising a great interest in educational matters ; held many offices of trust, and was always a valued and respected citizen. Mr. Tolmie was known to ethnologists for his contributions to the history and linguistics of the native races of the "West Coast, and dated his interest in ethnological matters from his contact with Mr. Horatio Hale, who visited the West Coast as an ethnologist to the "Wilkes exploring expedition. He afterwards transmitted vocabularies of a number of the tribes to Dr. Scouler and to. Mr. George Gibbs, some of which were published in Contributions to North American Ethnology. In 1884 he published, in conjunction with Dr. G. M. Dawson, a nearly complete series of short vocabularies of the principal languages met with in British Columbia, and his name is to be found frequently quoted as an authority on the history of the Northwest Coast and its ethnology. He frequently contributed to the press upon public questions and events now historical. Townsend (Dr. J. K.) See Haldeman (S.S.) Treasury. The Treasury of Languages. | A | rudimentary dictionary | of | universal philology. | Daniel iii. 4. [ [One line in Hebrew.] | Hall and Co., 25, Paternoster row, London. | (All rights reserved.) [1873 ?] Colophon: London: | printed by Grant and co., 72-78, Turnmill street, E. C. Title verso blank 1 1. advertisement (dated February 7th, 1873) verso blank 11. introduction ; Chinookan languages. 71 Treasury—C ontinued. (signed J. B. and dated October 31st, 1873) pp. i-iv, dictionary of languages (in alphabetical order) pp. 1-301, list of contributors p. [302], errata verso colophon 11.12°. Edited by James Bonwick,Esq.,F. R. G. S., assisted by about twenty-two contributors, whose initials are signed to the most important of their respective articles. In the compilation of the work free use was made of Bagster's Bible of Every Land and Dr. Latham's Elements of Comparative Philology. There are also references to an appendix, concerning which there is the following note on p. 301: " Notice.— Owing to the unexpected enlargement of this Book in course of printing, the Appendix is necessarily postponed; and the m ore especially as additionalmatterhasbeenreceived sufficient to make a second volume. And it will be proceeded with so soon as an adequate list of Subscribers shall be obtained." Under the name of each language is a brief statement of the family or stock to which it belongs, and the country where it is or was spoken, together with references, in many cases, to the principal authorities on the grammar and vocabulary. An addenda is given at the end of each letter. Scattered references to the dialects of the Chinookan. Copies seen: Eames. Tribal names: Chinook See Boas (E.) Chinook Douglass (J.) Chinook Haines (E.M.) Triibner & Co. Bibliotheca Hispano- Americana. | A | catalogue | of | Spanish hooks | printed in | Mexico, Guatemala, Honduras, the Antilles, ] Venezuela, Columbia, Eonador, Peru, Chili, | Uruguay, and the Argeatioe Republic; | andof | Portuguese book-sprinted in Brazil. ] Followed by a collection of ] works on the aboriginal languages j of Anieriea, | On Sale at the affixed Prices, %y | Trubner & «o.4 18 & 60, Paternoster row, London. 11870.. | iOne shijIlliBg .and saxpenoe. Ooverttitle as .ahove verso contents 11. aio inside title:; catalogue pp. 1-184, colophon v,erso advertisements 11.16°. Works on She aboriginal languages of America, 3pp. 162-184, .contains a list of books.(alpha- ibetieally arranged iby languages) on this subject,, inelitding general iworks, pp. jt6jSrA)S8; Cbaaauik, pgu 469-170. sjopies seen: HSames, Pilling. j— A | catalogue | .of | dictionaries ;and jgicaimmairs |.©f the Principal Languages and Dialects | of the Would. | For sale fey j THilbner & co„, Trubner & Co.— Continued. London: | Triibner & co., 8 & 60 Paternoster row. | 1872. Cover title as above, title as above verso names of printers 1 1. notice verso blank 11. catalogue pp. 1-64, addenda and corrigenda 1 1. advertisements verso blank 1 1. a list of works relating to the science of language etc. pp. 1-16, 8°. Contains titles of a few works in or relating to the Chinookan languages, p. 12. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. A later edition with title-page as follows: Triibner's ) catalogue | of | dictionaries and grammars | of the | Principal Languages and Dialects of the World. | Second edition, | considerably enlarged and revised, with an alphabetical index. | A guide for students and booksellers. | [Monogram.] | London: | Triibner & co., 57 and 59, Ludgate hill, j 1882. Cover title as above, title as above verso list of catalogues 11. notice and preface to the second edition .p. Hi, index pp, iv-viU, text pp. 1-168, additions pp. 169-170, Triibner's Oriental * Linguistic Publications pp. 1-95,8°. Contains titles of works in American languages (general), pp. 3,169 j Chinook, p, 37, Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. Trumbull; This word following a tiitle or wijtfein parentheses after a note indicates that a copy o f the work referred to has been seeiji by the compiler in the library of Dr. J. Hammond Trumbull, Hartford, Conn. [Trumbull (Dr. James Hammond).] Catalogue | of the | American Library | of the late | mr. George Brinley, | of Hartford, Conn. | Part I. | America in general | New France Canada etc. | the British colonies to 17761 New England | [-Part IV. | Psalms and hymns music science and art | [&c. ten lines] | Hartford | Press of the Case Lock- wood & Brainard Company | 1878 [-1886] 4 parts, 8°. Compiled by Dr. J. H. Trumbull. The fifth and last part is said to be in prepara- :tio,n. Indian languages: general treatises and collections, pant 3, pp. 123-124; Northwest coast, p..i4,i: .([opftes seen : Eames, Pilling. , James Hammond Trumbull, philologist, was .born in Stonington, Conn., December 20,1821. He entered Tale in 1838, and though, owing to ill health, he was not graduated with his class, his name was enrolled among its members in 1850 and he was given the degree of A. M. He settled in Hartford in 1847 and was assistant 1 72 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Trumbull (J. H.) —Continued. secretary of state in 1847-1852 and 1858-1861, and secretary in 1861-1864, also state librarian in | 1854. Soon after going to Hartford he joined the Connecticut Historical Society, was its corresponding secretary in 1849-1863, and was elected its president in 1863. He has been a trustee of the "Watkinson free library of Hartford and its librarian since 1863, and has been an officer of the "Wads worth athenseum since 1864. Dr. Trumbull was an original member of the American Philological Association in 1869, and its president in 1874-1875. He has been a member of the American Oriental Society since 1860 and the American Ethnological Society since 1867, and honorary member of many State historical societies. In 1872 he was elected to the National Academy of Sciences. Since 1858 he has devoted special attention to the subject of the Indian languages of North America. He has prepared a dictionary and vocabulary to John Eliot's Indian bible, and is probably the only American scholar that is now able to read that work. In 1873 he was chosen lecturer on Indian languages of North America at Yale, but loss of health and other labors soon compelled his resignation. The degree of LL.D. was conferred on him by Vale in 1871 and by Harvard in 1887, while Columbia gave him an L. H. D. in 1887.—Appleton's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. Tylor (Edward Burnett). Primitive culture: | Researches into the development of mythology, philosophy, | religion, art, and custom. | By | Edward B. Tylor, | author of " Researches into the early history of mankind," &c. | [Two lines quotation.] | In two volumes. | Vol. I[-II]. | London: | John Murray, Albemarle street. | 1871. | (Rights of Translation and reproduction reserved.) 2vols.: title verso names of printers 11. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp. vii-x. text pp. 1-453; half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names of printers 1 1. contents pp. v-viii, text pp. 1-410, index pp. 411-426,8°. Emotional and imitative language (chapters v and vi, vol. 1, pp. 145-217) contains, passim, words in a number of North American languages, among them the Chinook and Chinook Jargon, pp. 167,170,174,184,186,189,191,193. Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, National Museum. Primitive Culture | Researches into the development of | mythology, philosophy, religion, | language, art and custom | By | Edward B. Tylor, LL.D., F. R. S | Author of [&c. one line] [ [Five lines quotation] | First American, from the second English editibn | In two volumes | Volume I [-II] | [Design] | Tylor (E. B.) — Gontinued. Boston | Estes & Lauriat | 143 Washington Street | 1874 2 vols.: half-title (Primitive culture) verso blank 1 1. title verso " Author's edition" 1 1. preface to the first edition pp. v-vi, preface to the second edition pp. vii-viii, contents pp. ix-xii, text pp. 1-502; half-title verso blank 1 i. title verso 'Author's edition" 1 1. contents pp. v-viii, text pp. 1-453, index pp. 455-470,8°. Emotional andimitativelanguage (chapters v and vi.vol. 1, pp. 160-239) contains afew Chinook and Jargon words on pp. 179,184,205.208,213. Copies seen: National Museum, Powell. Primitive'Culture | Researches into the development of | mythology, philosophy, religion, | language, art and custom | By | Edward B. Tylor, LL.D., F. R. S | Author of "Researches into the Early History of Mankind," &c | [Quotation five lines] | First American, from tho second English edition | In two volumes | Volume I [-II] | New York | Henry Holt and company | 1874 2 vols. 8°. Collation and linguistic contents as. under title above. Copies seen: Powell. Primitive Culture | Researches into the development of | mythology, philosophy, religion, | language, art and custom | By | EdwardB. Tylor, LL.D., F. R. S | Author of " Researches into the Early History of Mankind," &c | [Quotation five lines] | Second American, from the second English edition | In two volumes | Volume I [-II] | [Design] | New York | Henry Holt and company | 1877 2 vols.: half-title (Primitive culture) verso blank 1 1. title verso 'Author's edition" 1 1. preface to t he first edition pp. v-vi, preface to the second edition pp. vii-viii, contents pp. ix- xii, text pp. 1-502; half title (Primitive culture) verso blank 11. title verso '' Author's edition " 11. contents pp. v-viii, text pp. 1-453, index pp. 455-470, 8°. Linguistic contents as under titles above. Gopies seen: Geological Survey. Third edition: London, John Murray, 1891,2 vols. 8°. Anthropology: | an introduction to the study of | man and civilization. | By | Edward B. Tylor, D. C. L., F. E :. | With illustrations. | London: | Macmillan and co. | 1881. | The Right of Translation and Reproduction is Reserved. CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 73 Tylor (E. B.) —Continued. Half-title verso design 1 1. title verso names ofprintersll. preface pp.v-viii, contents pp.ix- xiUist of illustrations pp.xiii-xv,textpp.l-440- selected books pp .441-442, indexpp. 443-448,12°. A few words, passim, in a number of North American languages, among them the Chinook, pp. 125,126. Copies seen: Boston Athenseum, British Museum, Congress. Anthropology: | an introduction to the study of | man and civilization. | By | Edward B.Tylor, D. C. L., F. R. S. | With illustrations. | New York: | D. Appleton and company, | 1,3, and 5 Bond street. | 1881. Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vii, contents pp. ix-xii, list of illustrations pp. xiii-xv, text pp. 1-440, selected books pp. 441-442, index pp. 443-448,12°. Linguistic contents as under title next above. Copies seen: Congress, Geological Survey, National Museum. Einleitung | in das | Studium der Anthropologie | und | Civilisation | von | Dr. Edward B. Tylor, | [&c. one line.] | Deutsche [&c. five lines.] | Braunschweig, | Druck und Verlag von Friedrich Vii wig und Sohn. | 1883. Pp. i-xix, 1-538,8°. Chapters 4 and 5, Die Sprache, pp. 134-178. Copies seen.- British Museum. Tylor (E. B.) — Continued. The international scientific series | Anthropology | An introduction to the study of | man and civilization | By Edward B. Tylor, D.C.L., F.R.S. | With illustrations | New York | D. Appleton and company | 1888 Half-title of the series verso blank 1 1. title as above verso blank 11. preface pp. v-vii, contents pp. ix-xii, list of illustrations pp. xiii-xv, text pp. 1-440, selected books pp. 441-442, index pp. 443-448,8°. Linguistic contents as under titles above. Copies seen: Harvard. Anthropology: | an introduction to the study of | man and civilization. | By | Edward B. Tylor, D. C. L., F. R. S. | With illustrations. | Second edition, revised. | London: | Macmillan and co. | and New York. | 1889. | The Right of Translation and Reproduction is Reserved. Half-title verso design 1 1. title verso names of printers etc. 1 1. preface pp. v-vii, contents pp. ix-xii, list of illustrations pp. xiii-xv, text pp. 1-440, selected books etc. pp. 441-442, index ! pp. 443-448,12°. Linguistic contents as under titles above. Copies seen: Eames. V. Vater (Dr. Johann Severin). Litteratur | der | Grammatiken, J^exika | und | Wortersammlungen | aller Sprachen der Erde | von | Johann Severin Vater. | Zweite, vollig umgearbeitete Aus- gabe | von | B. Jiilg. | Berlin, 1847. | In der Nicolaischen Buchhandlung. Title verso blank 11. dedication verso blank 1 1. vorwort (signed B. Jiilg and dated 1. December, 1846) pp. v-x, titles of general works on the subject pp. xi-xii, text (alphabetically arranged by names of languages) pp. 1-450, nachtrage und berichtigungen pp. 451-541, saohregister pp. 542-563, autorenregister pp. 564-592, verbes- sernngen 211.8°. Titles of works in or containing material relating to the Cathlascon, p. 472; Chinuk, pp. 69,474. Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Harvard. At the Fischer sale, no. 1710, a copy sold for 1*. The earlier edition, Berlin, 1815, contains no Chinookan material. Vocabulary | of the | Chinook Jargon: | the complete language | used | by the | Indians of Oregon, | Washington ter- ri- | tory and British possessions. | Vocabulary—Continued. San Francisco: | published by Hutch- in gs & Rosenfield, | 146 Montgomery street. | Towne & Bacon, printers, 125 Clay street, cor. Sansome. | 1860. Cover title as above, no inside title; text pp. 1-8,16°. Chinook [Jargon]-English vocabulary, pp. 1-6 Table of distances, pp. 7-8. Copies seen: Bancroft. Vocabulary of the Jargon. See Lionnet (-)• Vocabulary: Cathlascon Cathlascon Cathlascon Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook See Buschmann (J. C. E.) Scouler (J.) Tolmie ("W. F.) Anderson (A. C.) Buschmann (J. C. E.) Chinook. Domenech (E.H.D.) Dunn (J.) Franchere (G.) Gallatin (A.) Hale (H.) Knipe (C.) Montgomerie (J.B.) Pinart (A. L.) f"4 BTBLIOGRAP HY OF THE cabulary— Continued. Vocabulary — -Continued. Chinook See Priest (J.) Chinook Jargon Lionnet (—) Chinook Rafinesque (C. S.) Chinook Jargon Macdonald (D. G. F.) Chinook Ross (A.) Chinook Jargon Palmer (J.) Chinook Soouler (J.) Chinook Jargon Parker (S.) Chinook Shortess (R.) Tolmie ("W. P.) Chinook Jarg on on Richardson (A. D.) Chinook Chinook Jarg Ross (A.) Chinook Tolmie ("W. P.) and Daw Chinook Jarg m Schoolcraft (H. R.) son (G.M.) Chinook Jarg on Scouler (J.) Chinook Wabass ("W. G.) Chinook Jarg on Sproat (G.M.) Chinook Jargon Anderson (A. C.) Chinook Jargon Swan (J. G.) Chinook Jargon Armstrong (A. N.) Chinook Jarg on Vocabulary. Chinook Jargon Belden (G. P.) Chinook Jarg 311 "Winthrop (T.) Chinook Jargon Bolduc (J.-B. Z.) Clakama Gatschet (A.S.) Chinook Jargon Chamberlain (A. F.) Clatsop ■ Emmons (G. T.) Chinook Jargon Cox (R.). Clatsop Halo (H.) Chinook Jargon Dictionary. Clatsop Lee (D.) andErost(J.H.) Chinook Jargon Eells (M.) Clatsop Semple (J. E.) Chinook Jargon Everette (W. E.) Nihaloth Hale (H.) Chinook Jargon Gallatin (A.) Wab.aikan Gatschet (A. S.) Chinook Jargon Gibbs (G f "Wahaikan Hale (H.) Chinook J argon Guide. Wappo Gatschet (A. S.) Chinook Jargon Haines (E.M.) "Wasko Curtin (J.) Chinook Jargon Hale (H.) Watlala Gallatin (A.) Chinook Jargon* . Hazlitt (W. C) "Watlala Hale (H.) Chinook Jargon Le Jeune (J. M. R.) AVatlala Latham (R. G.) w. i ,ui Wabass (Dr. W. G.) Vocabulary of the Chinook language. Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4°, in the library of tho Bureau of Ethnology, "Washington, D. C. Recorded at Cowlitz landing, Feby., 1858. A list of 23 English words with Chinook and Cowlitz equivalents. Wahaikan: See Gatschet (A. S.) Hale (H.) Vocabulary Vocabulary Wappo: Vocabulary Wasko: Vocabulary See Gatschet (A. S.) See Curtin (J.) Watkinson: This word following a title or within parentheses after anote indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the Watkinson library, Hartford, Conn. Watlala: Grammatic comments See Bancroft (H.H.) Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) Vocabulary Hale (H.) Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) Words Bancroft (H. H.) Wellesley: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler, belonging to the library of Wellesley college, Wellesley, Mass. Western. A Western Volapiik. In the Critic, vol. 14, pp. 201-202, New York, 1890,4°. (Pilling.) "Western — Continued. A review of Hale (H.), An international idiom. A general discussion, including a number of examples, with meanings, of the Chinook Jargon. Whymper (Frederick). Travel and adventure | in the | territory of Alaska, ) formerly Russian America—now ceded to the | United States—and in various other | parts of the north Pacific. | By Frederick Whymper. [[Design.] | With map and illustration. | London: | John Murray, Albemarle street. | 1868. | The right of Translation is reserved. Half-title verso blank 11. title verso names of printers 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii-ix, contents pp. xi-xix, list of illustrations p. [xx], text pp. 1-306, appendix pp. 307- 331, map, plates, 8°. A brief discussion of the Chinuk language, with a few examples, pp. 21,24. Copies seen: Boston Public, British Museum, Congress. At the Field sale, catalogue no. 2539, a copy sold for $2.75. An American edition titled as follows: Travel and adventure | in the | territory of Alaska, | formerly Russian America—now ceded to the | United CHItfOOKAN LANGUAGES. 75 Whymper (F.)—Continued. States—and in various other | parts of the north Pacific. | By Frederick Whymper. | [Picture.] | With map and illustrations. | New York: | Harper & brothers, publishers, | Franklin square. | 1869. Frontispiece 11. title verso blank 11. dedication verso blank 11. preface pp. xi-xii, contents pp. xiii-xviii, list of illustrations p. xix, text pp. 21-332, appendix pp. 333-353, map and plates, 8°. Linguistic contents as in the London edition, titled next above, pp. 39,42. Copies seen: Bancioft, Boston Athenseum, Geological Survey, Powell. Reprinted, 1871, pp. xix, 21-353,8°. A French edition titled as follows: Frederick Whymper | Voyages et aventures | dans | 1'Alaska (ancienne Amerique russe) | Ouvrage traduit de l'Anglais J avec l'autorisation de l'auteur | par Emile Jonveaux | lllus- tre" de 37 gravures sur bois | et accom- pagne" d'une carte | Paris | librairie Hachette et Cie | boulevard Saint-Germain, 79 | 18711 Tous droits reserve's Cover title as above, half-title verso name of printer 11. title verso blank 11. preface pp. i-ii, half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-405, table des chapitres pp. 407-412, map, 8°. Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 29-30. Copies seen: Pilling. Wilson (Daniel). Prehistoric man | Researches into the origin of civilisation | in the old and the new world | By | Daniel Wilson, LL. D. | professor of history and English literature in University college, Toronto; | author of the "Archaeology and prehistoric annals of Scotland," etc. | In two volumes. | Volume I[-II]. | Cambridge: | Macmillan and co., | and 23, Henrietta street, Covent garden, | London, | 1862. | (The right of Translation is reserved.) 2vols.: half-title verso design 1 1. colored frontispiece 11. title verso name of printer 11. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii-xvi, contents pp. xvii-xviii, text pp. 1-488, plan; half-title verso design 1 1. colored frontispiece 11.title verso name of printer 11. contents pp. v-vi, text pp. 1-475, appendix pp. 478-483, index pp. 485-499, verso advertisement, 8°. Remarks on the Chinook Jargon, with examples, vqj. 2, pp. 429-432. Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, Eames, Watkinson. Wilson (D.) —Continued. Prehistoric man | Researches into the origin of civilisation | in the old and the new world | By | Daniel Wilson, LL. D. | professor [&c. two lines.] | Second edition. | London: | Macmillan and co. 11865. | (The right of Translation is reserved.) Half-title verso design 1 l.colored frontispiece 1 1. title verso name of printer 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. contents pp. vii-xiii, colored plate 11. illustrations pp. xv-xvi, preface (dated 29th April 1865) pp. xvii-xviii, preface to the first edition pp. xix-xxvi, half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-622, index pp. 623-635,8°. Remarks on the Oregon Jargon, with examples, pp. 586-588. Copies seen: British Museum, Eames. Prehistoric man | Researches into the Origin of Civilisation | in the Old and the New World. | By | Daniel Wilson, LL. D., F. R. S. E. | professor [&c. two lines.] | Third edition, revised and enlarged, | with illustrations. | In two volumes. | Vol.1 [-II]. | London: | Macmillan and Co. | 1876. | (The right of Translation is reserved.) 2 vols.: half-title verso design 1 1. colored frontispiece 1 1. title verso names of printers 1 1. dedication verso blank 11. preface (dated 18th November 1875) pp. vii-viii, contents pp. ix- xiii, illustrations pp. xiv-xv, text pp. 1-399; half-title verso design 11. colored frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-ix, illustrations pp. x-xi, text pp. 1-386, index pp. 387-401, list of works by the same author etc. 11.8°. Remarks on the Chinook language or Oregon Jargon, with examples, vol. 2, pp. 334-338. Copies seen: British Museum, Eames,Harvard. Winthrop (Theodore). The canoe and the saddle, | adventures among the northwestern | rivers and forests; | and Isthmania. | By Theodore Winthrop, | author of [&c. two lines.] | Boston: | Ticknor and Fields. 11863. Title verso copyright notice and names of printers 1 1. contents verso blank 1 1. text pp. 5-375,10°. A partial vocabulary (about 275 words and phrases, alphabetically arranged) of the Chinook Jargon, pp. 299-302. Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Athenaeum, Congress, Harvard, Mallet. I have seen mention of an edition: New York, 1876,16°. Theodore Winthrop, author, born in New Haven, Conn., September 22, 1828, died near Great Bethel, Va., June 10,1861, was the son of 76 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. Winthrop (T.)—Continued. Francis Bayard Winthrop. He was graduated at Yale in 1848, with the Clark scholarship, on which he continued there a year, studying mental science, languages, and history. In 1849 he went to recruit his health in Europe, where he remained until January, 1851. There he became acquainted with William H. Aspin- wall, whose children he taught for some time, and through him Winthrop entered the employ of the Paoiflc Mail Steamship Company, to whose offices in Panama he was transferred in 1852. In the following year he visited California and Oregon, and thence he returned overland to New York. In December, 1853, he joined, as a volunteer, the expedition under Lieut. Isaac G. Strain, to survey a canal route across the Isthmus of Panama, and soon after his return, in March, 1854, he began to study law with Charles Tracy. He was admitted to the bar in 1855. At the opening of the civil war Winthrop enlisted in the Seventh New York regiment, which he accompanied to Washington. Soon afterward he went with Gen. Benjamin F. Butler to Fort Monroe as military secretary, with the rank of major, and with his commanding officer he planned the attack on Little and Great Bethel, in which he took part. During the action at the latter place he sprang upon a log to rally his men and received a bullet in his heart.—Appleton's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. Wisconsin Historical Society: These words, following a title or within parenthesis aftera note, indicate that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of that institution, Madison, Wis. Words: Cathlascon See Buschmann (J. C .E.) Cathlascon Latham (R.G.) Chinook Bancroft (H. H.) Chinook Brinton (D. G.) Chinook Buschmann (J. < 3.E.) Chinook Chamberlain (A F.) Chinook Daa(L.K.) Chinook Grasserie (R. de la). Chinook Haines (E.M.) Chinook Latham (R. G.) Chinook Platzmann (J.) ■ Chinook Pott (A. F.) Chinook Smith (S.B.) Chinook Tylor (E.B.) Chinook Youth's. Chinook J argon Chamberlain (A F.) Chinook J irgon Crane (A.) Chinook J irgon Chase (P. E.) Chinook J wgon Eells (M.) Chinook Jargon Latham (R. G.) Chinook J irgon Leland (C. G.) Chinook J irgon Norris (P. W.) Chinook J argon Tylor (E.B.) Chinook J argon Wilson (D.) Watlala Bancroft (H. H.) Y. if Youth's. The youth's | companion: | A juvenile monthly Magazine published for | the benefit of the Puget Sound Catholic Indian | Missions; and set to type, printed and in part | written by the pupils of the Tulalip, Wash. Ty. | Indian Industrial Boarding Schools, under | the control of the Sisters of Charity. | Approved by the Rt. Rev. Bishop [jEgidius, of Nesqualy.] | Vol. I. May, 1881. No. l[-Vol. V. May, 1886. No. 60]. [Tulalip Indian Reservation, Snohomish Co. W.T.] Youth's — Continued. Edited by Rev. J. B. Boulet. Instead of beiug paged continuously, continued articles have a separate pagination dividing the regular numbering. For instance, in no. 1, pp. 11-14, Lives of the saints, are numbered 1-4 and the article is continued in no. 2 on pp.' 5-8, taking the place of pp. 41-44 of the regular numbering. Discontinued after May, 1886, on account of the protracted illness of the editor. Lord's prayer in the Cascade language, p. 284.—The name of God in 70 different languages, among them the Chinook, vol. 2, p. 247. Copies seen: Congress, Georgetown, Wellesley. CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 1820 Chinook Vocabulary Franchere (G.) 1830 Jargon Sentences Green (J.S.) 1831 Jargon Vocabulary Cox (R.) 1832 Jargon Vocabulary Cox (R.) 1832-1833 Chinook Vocabulary Rafinesque (C. S.) 1833 Chinook Vocabulary Priest (J.) 1835 Chinook and Jargon Vocabularies Chinook. 1836 Chinook Vocabulary Gallatin (A. S.) 1838 Jargon Vocabulary Parker (S.) 1840 Jargon Vocabulary Parker (S.) 1840-184? Jargon Various Blanchet (F.N.) 1841 Chinook Tribal names Gairdner (—). 1841 Chinook and Cathlascon Vocabularies Scouler (J.) 1841 Chinook and Cathlascon Vocabularies Tolmie (W.F.) 1842 Jargon Vocabulary Parker (S.) 1843 Jargon Vocabulary Bolduc (J.-B. Z.) 1844 Cathlascon Various Leo (D.) and Frost (J. H.) 1814 Chinook Lord's prayer, etc. Duflot de Mofras (E.) 1844 Chinook Vocabulary . Dunn (J.) 1844 Jargon Vocabulary Parker (S.) 1846 Cathlascon Words Latham (R. G.) 1810 Chinook Vocabulary Dunn (J.) 1846 Jargon Vocabulary Parker (S.) 1846 Jargon Vocabulary Scouler (J.) 1846 Yarious Various Hale (H.) 1846 Various Various Hale (H.) 1847 Jargon Vocabulary Palmer (J.) 1847 Various Bibliographic Vater (J. S.) 1848 Chinook Proper names Catlin (G.) 1848 Chinook and Cathlascon Words Latham (R. G.) 1818 Chinook and Jargon Vocabularies Montgomerie (J. E.) 1848 Jargon Sentences Allen (A. J.) 1848 Yarious Various Gallatin (A.) 1849 Chinook and Jargon Vocabularies Ross (A.) 1850 Jargon Sentences Allen (A. J.) 1850 Jargon Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 1850 Jargon Vocabulary Palmer (J.) 1851 Jargon Vocabulary Palmer (J.) 1851-1857 Chinook Classification Schoolcraft (H.R.) 1852 Chinook General discussion Berghaus (H.) 1852 Chinook Proper names Catlin (G.) 1852 Chinook and Clakama Proper names Stanley (J. M.) 1852 Jargon Vocabulary Palmer (J.) 1853 Chinook Classification Gallatin (A.) 1853 Chinook Vocabulary Shortess (It.) , 1853 Clatsop Vocabulary Emmons (G. F.) 1853 Jargon Vocabulary Lionnet (—). 1854 Jargon Vocabulary Franchere (G.) 1856 Chinook General discussion Latham (R. G.) 1856 Jargon Dictionary Blanchet (F.N.) 1857 t-hinook Words Daa (L. K.) 77 78 CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 1857 Chinook and Jargon Vocabularies Swan (J. G.) 1857 Chinook and Jargon Vocabularies Swan (J. G.) 1857 Jargon Vocabulary Anderson (A. C:) 1857 Jargon Vocabulary Armstrong (A.N.) 1858 Chinook Classification J6han (L. F.) 1858 Chinook Vocabulary Buschmann (J. C. E.) 1858 Chinook and Jargon Bibliographic Ludewig (H. E.) 1858 Jargon Vocabulary Anderson (A. C.) 1858 Jargon Vocabulary Chinook. 1858 Jargon Vocabulary Guide-book. 1858 Jargon Vocabulary Hazlitt (W. C.) 1858 Jargon Vocabulary Wabass (W.G.) 1859 Jargon Sentences Allen (A.J.) 1859 Chinook Vocabulary, etc. Busohmann (J. C. E.) 1860 Chinook Classification Schoolcraft (H. R.) 1860 Chinook Numerals : Haldeman (S.S.) 1860 Chinook Vocabulary, etc. Domenech (E. H. D.) I860? Jargon Text Demers (M.) 1860 Jargon Vocabulary Vocabulary. 1860 Various Various Latham (R. G.) 1862 Chinook Words Pott (A. F.) 1862? Jargon Dictionary Blanchet (F. N.) 1862 Jargon Dictionary Dictionary. 1862? Jargon Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 1862 Jargon Vocabulary Macdonald (D. G. F.) 1862 Jargon Geueral discussion Wilson (D.) 1862 Watlala Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 1863 Chinook Bibliographic Gibbs (G.) 1863 Chinook Dictionary Gibbs (G.) 1863 Chinook Dictionary Gibbs (G.) 1863 Jargon Bibliographio Gibbs (G.) 1863 Jargon Dictionary f& Gibbs (G.) 1863 Jargon Dictionary Gibbs (G.) 1863 Jargon Dictionary Gibbs (G.), note. 1863 Jargon Vocabulary Macdonald (D. G. F.), note. 1863 Jargon Vocabulary Winthrop (T.) 1864 Chinook Classification Jehan (L.F.) 1865 Jargon Dictionary Dictionary. 1865 Jargon Dictionary Stuart (G.) 1865 Jargon General discussion Wilson (D.) 1865- Jargon Sentences Macfie (M.) 1866 Jargon Hymns Macleod (X. D.) 1867 Chinook and Jargon Bibliographic Leclerc (C.) 1867 Jargon ■ Vocabulary Richardson (A. D.) 1868 Chinook General discussion Whymper (F.) 1868 Jargon Dictionary ■ Blanchet (F. N.) 1868 Jargon Vocabulary Sproat (G.M.) 1868-1892 Chinook Bibliographic Sabin (J.) 1869 Chinook General discussion Whymper (F.) 1869 Jargon Numerals Chase (P. E.) 1869 Jargon Vocabulary Richardson (A. D.), note. 186? Jargon Hymns Macleod (X. D.) 1870 Chinook Bibliographic Triibner & Co. 1870 Clatsop Vocabulary Semple(J.E.) 1870 Jargon Lord's prayer Marietti (P.) 1871 Chinook General discussion Whymper (F.) 1871 Chinook Proper names Catlin (G.) 1871 Chinook and Jargon Words Tylor (E. B.) 1871 Jargon Dictionary, etc. Demers (M.), et al. 1871? Jargon Dictionary Dictionary. 1872 Chinook Bibliographic Trubner & Co. 1872 Jargon Dictionary Langevin (H. L.) 1873 Chinook and Jargon Bibliographic Field (T. W.) 1873 ? « Jargon Dictionary Blanchet (F. N.) 1873 Jargon Dictionary Dictionary. 1874 Chinook and Jargon Words Tylor (E. B.) CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 79 1874 CliinOOk ahd Jargon Words 1874-1876 Various Various 1875 Chinook and Jargon Bibliographic 1875 Jargon General discussion 1875 Jargon Sermons 1875 Jargon Vocabulary 1876 Chinook Bibliographic - 1876 Jargon General discussion 1876 Jargon Words 1877 Chinook General discussion 1877 Chinook Songs 1877 diiinflok General discussion 1877 Chihodk and jafgOn Wdrds 1877 Clakama Vocabtfiary 1877? Jargon Dictionary 1877 Jargon Dictionary 1877 Wasco Vocabulary 1877-1887 Chinook Grammatic 1878 Chinook Classification 1878 Chinook General discussion 1878 Chinook Words 1878 Chinook and Jargon* Bibliographic 1878 Jargon Dictionary 1878? Jargon Dictionary 1878 Jargon Hymn book 1878-1886 Various Bibliographic 1879 Jargon Dictionary 1880 Chinook Classification 1880 Jargon Dictionary 1880-1881 Jargon Grammatic 1881 Chinook and Jargon Words 1881 Chinook. and Jargon Words 1881-1886 Cascade Vocabulary 1882 Chinook Bibliographic 1882 Chinook Classification 1882 Chinook General discussion 1882 Chinook General discussion 1882 Chinook Words 1882 Chinook: ind Jargon Bibliographic 1882 Jargon Dictionary 1882 Various Various 1883 Chinook; and Jargon Words 1883 Jargon Dictionary 1883 Jargon Lord's prayer 1883 Jargon Lord's prayer 1883 Jargon Words 1884 Chinook General discussion 1884 Chinook Vocabularies 1884 Chinook Lord's prayer 1884 Jargon Dictionary 1881 Jargon Hymns 1884 Jargon Ten commandments 1884 Wasco Vocabulary 1884-1887 Chinook Bibliographic 1885 Chinook Classification 1885 Chinook General discussion 1885 Various Bibliographic 1885-1889 Chinook General discussion 1886 Chinook Proper names 1886 Jargon Dictionary 1886 Jargon Dictionary 1886 Jargon Hymns 1886 Various Bibliographic 1887 Chinook Proper names 1887 ghinook Proper names Tylor (E. B.) Bancroft (H. H.) Field (T. W.) Eells (M.) Eells (M.) Richardson (A. D.) Platzmann (J.) Wilson (D.) Clough (J. C.) Gatschet (A. S.) Eells (M.) Beach (W.W.) Tylor (E. B.) Gatschet (A, S.) Dictionary^ Guide. Gatschet (A. SO Miiller (F.) Keane (A. H.) Bates (H. W.) Duncan (D.) Leclerc (C.) Blanchet (F. N.) Gill (J.K.), note. Eells (M.) Trumbull (J. H.) Blanchet (F. N.) Sayce (A. H.) Good (J. B.) Eells (M.) Tylor (E.B.) Tylor (E.B.) Youth's. Trdbner & Co. Keane (A. H.), note. Bates (H.W.) Drake (S. G.) Smith (S. B.) Eells (M.) Gill (J. K.) Bancroft (H. H.) Tylor (E. B.) Dictionary. Everette (W. E.) Everette (W. E.) Norris (P. W.) Schoolcraft (H.R.) Tolmie (W. F.) and Dawson (G.M.) Bergholtz (G. F.) Gill (J. K.) Everette (W. E.) Everette (W. E.) Curtin (J.) Pott (A. F.) Keane (A. Ii.),note. Bates (H. W.) Pilling (J. C.) Featherman (A.) Catlin (G.) Durieu (P.), note. Le Jeune (J. M. R.) Eells (M.) Quaritch (B.) Catlin (GO Catlin (G.) 80 CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. I •I 1887 Jargon Dictionary Dictionary. 1887 Jargon Dictionary Dictionary: 1887 Jargon Dictionary Gill (J. E.) 1887 Various Bibliographic DufossS (E.) 1887 Various Bibliographic Quaritch (B.) 1887 Various Bibliographic Quaritch (B.) 1888 Chinook Numerals Eells (M.) 1888 Chinook Proper names Catlin (G.) 1888 Chinook Words Brinton (D. G.) 1888 Chinook Words Brinton (D. G.) 1888 Chinook and Jargon Various Haines (E.M.) 1888 Chinook and Jargon Words Tylor (E. B.) 1888 Jargon Dictionary Prosch (T. W.) 1888 Jargon General discussion Leland (C. G.) 1888 Jargon Numerals Eells (M.) 1888 Jargon Numerals Eells (M.), note. 1888 Jargon Songs Boas (F.) 1889 Chinook and Jargon Words Tylor (E. B.) 1889 Jargon Dictionary Dictionary. 1889 Jargon Dictionary Gill(J.K.) 1889 Jargon Dictionary Tate (CM.) 1889 Jargon Hymn book * Eells (M.) 1889 Jargon Numerals Eells (M.) 1889 Jargon Vocabulary Nicoll (E. H.) 1890 Chinook Words Brinton (D. G.) 1890 Chinook Words Grasserie (R. de la). 1890 Chinook Words Hale(H.) 1890 Chinook Words Hale (H.) 1890 Jargon Dictionary, eto. Hale (H.) 1890 Jargon Review Crane (A.) 1890 Jargon Review Leland (C. G.) 1890 Jargon Review Western. •1890 Jargon Sermon New. 1891 Chinook Classification Brinton (D. G.) 1891 Chinook Classification Powell (J. W.) 1891 Chinook Classification Powell (J. W.) 1891 Jargon Dictionary Coones (S. F.) 1891 Jargon Dictionary Gill (J. K.) 1891 Jargon Hymn book Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 1891 Jargon Periodical Le Jeune (J.M. R.) 1891 Jargon Periodical Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 1891 Jargon Periodical Le Jeune (J. M. B.) 1891 Jargon Review Charencey (H. de). 1891 Jargon Words Chamberlain (A. F.) 1891-1893 Jargon Periodical Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 1892 Jargon Bible history St. Onge (L. N.) 1892 Jargon Dictionary Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 1892 Jargon Play Le Jeune (J.M.R.) 1892 Jargon Primer Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 1892 Various Geographic names Eells (M.) 1893 Chinook Grammar, dictionary Boas (F.) 1893 Chinook Grammatic Boas (F.) 1893 Chinook Texts Boas (F.) 1893 Chinook Various Boas (F.) 1893 Jargon Bible history Durieu (P.) 1893 Jargon Bible history St. Onge (L. N.) 1893 Jargon Dictionary Bulmer (T. S.) 1893 Jargon Dictionary Bulmer (T.S.) 1893 Jargon Dictionary Bulmer (T.S.) 1893 Jargon Dictionary Bulmer (T. S.) 1893 Jargon Dictionary Eells (M.) 1893 Jargon Dictionary St.Onge(L.N.) 1893 Jargon Grammar, dictionary Bulmer (T. S.) 1893 Jargon Hymns St.Onge (L.N.) 1893 Jargon Hymns, songs Bulmer (T. S.) 1893 Jargon Legends St. Onge (L.N.) CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 81 1893 Jargon 1893 Jargon 1893 Jargon 1893 Jargon 1893 Jargon J Chinook J Chinook } Jargon i Jargon J Various and Jargon Lord's prayer Prayers Reader Various Vocabulary Hymns Vocabularies Vooabulary Vocabulary Tribal names Bulmer (T. S.) Bulmer (T. S.) Le Jeune (J. M. R.) Bulmer (T.S.) Chamberlain (A. F.) Tate (CM.) Pinart (A. L.) Belden (G. P.) Eells (M.) Douglass (J.) ■■■:./:■ CHIN- 1— 1'niTTf'ifMIMI ■nTim;fi5Ei*MW| I t >*.' I r> I I \ •f-Hyta^ kS ~~1 TUB TORCH rKBSS BOOK SHOP, i 1 li
Includes index. Other Copies: http://www.worldcat.org/oclc/21626541
Bibliographies
ZPM841.C6 P6
English
Vancouver : University of British Columbia Library
Washington : Government Printing Office
Images provided for research and reference use only. For permission to publish, copy, or otherwise distribute these images please contact digital.initiatives@ubc.ca.
Original Format: University of British Columbia. Library. Rare Books and Special Collections. ZPM841.C6 P6
Chinook jargon--Bibliography
Chinook language--Bibliography
Bibliography of the Chinookan languages (including the Chinook jargon)
Text